Scripture · Sanskrit Bible with the King James Version · the Pāli Canon

Search Scripture Search

Chapters on Legal Topics 10 खन्धक 10

Chapter: 12345678910111213141516171819202122

1. Kosambakavivādakathā

Pāli in Devanagari; under each word its Roman pronunciation, syllable by syllable (ṃ = nasal hum). Tap a Pāli word for its meaning (PTS Pāli-English Dictionary); tap again to open it in the Pāli dictionary.

Verse: 123456789101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233343536373839404142434445464748495051525354555657585960616263646566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596979899100101102103104105106107108109110111112113114115116117118119120121122123124125126127128129130131132133134135136137138139140141142143144145146147148149150151152153154155156157158159160161162163164165166167168169170171172173174175176177178179180181182183184185186187188189190191192193194195196197198199200201202203204205206207208209210211212213214215216217218219220221222223224225226227228229230231232233234235236237238239240241242243244245246247248249250251252253254255256257258259260261262263264265266267268269270271272273274275276277278279280281282283284285286287288289290291292293294295296297298299300301302303304305306307308309310311312313314315316317318319320321322323324325326327328329330331332333334335336337338339340341342343344345346347348349350351352353354355356357358359360361362363364365366367368369370371372373374375376377378379380381382383384385386387388389390391392393394395396397398399400401402403404405406407408409410411412413414415416417418419420421422423424425426427428429430431432433434435436437438439440441442443444445446447448449450451452453454455456457458459460461462463464465466467468469470471472473474475476477478479480481482483484485486487488489490491492493494495496497498499500501502503504505506507508509510511512513514515516517518519520521522523524525526527528529530531532533534535536537538539540541542543544545546547548549550551552553554555556557558559560561562563564565566567568569570571572573574575576577578579580581582583584585586587588589590591592593594595596597598599600601602603604605606607608609610611612613614615616617618619620621622623624625626627628629630631632633634635636637638639640641642643644645646647648649650651652653654655656657658659660661662663664665666667668669670671672673674675676677678679680681682683684685686687688689690691692693694695696697698699700701702703704705706707708709710711712713714715716717718719720721722723724725726727728729730731732733734735736737738739740741742743744745746747748749750751752753754755756757758759760761762763764765766767768769770771 · Hide pronunciation

1. 1

   थेरवादthe·ra·vā·da विनयपिटकvi·na·ya·pi·ṭa·ka

   Theravāda Vinayapiṭaka

   Theravāda Collection on Monastic Law

2. 2

   महावग्गma·hā·vag·ga

   Mahāvagga

   The Great Division

3. 3

   10। कोसम्बकक्खन्धकko·sam·ba·kak·khan·dha·ka

   10. Kosambakakkhandhaka

   The chapter on division in the Sangha

4. 4

   1। कोसम्बकविवादकथाko·sam·ba·ka·vi·vā·da·ka·thā

   1. Kosambakavivādakathā

   1. The account of the dispute at Kosambī

5. 5

   तेनte·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na बुद्धोbud·dho भगवाbha·ga·vā कोसम्बियंko·sam·bi·yaṃ विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti घोसितारामे।gho·si·tā·rā·me

   Tena samayena buddho bhagavā kosambiyaṁ viharati ghositārāme.

   At one time when the Buddha was staying at Kosambī in Ghosita’s Monastery,

6. 6

   तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपन्नोā·pan·no होति।ho·ti

   Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu āpattiṁ āpanno hoti.

   a certain monk had committed an offense.

7. 7

   सोso तस्साtas·sā आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā आपत्तिदिट्ठिā·pat·ti·diṭ·ṭhi होति;ho·ti

   So tassā āpattiyā āpattidiṭṭhi hoti;

   He regarded it as an offense,

8. 8

   अञ्ञेañ·ñe भिक्खूbhik·khū तस्साtas·sā आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā अनापत्तिदिट्ठिनोa·nā·pat·ti·diṭ·ṭhi·no होन्ति।hon·ti

   aññe bhikkhū tassā āpattiyā anāpattidiṭṭhino honti.

   but there were other monks who did not.

9. 9

   सोso अपरेनa·pa·re·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na तस्साtas·sā आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā अनापत्तिदिट्ठिa·nā·pat·ti·diṭ·ṭhi होति;ho·ti

   So aparena samayena tassā āpattiyā anāpattidiṭṭhi hoti;

   Some time later he no longer regarded it as an offense,

10. 10

    अञ्ञेañ·ñe भिक्खूbhik·khū तस्साtas·sā आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā आपत्तिदिट्ठिनोā·pat·ti·diṭ·ṭhi·no होन्ति।hon·ti

    aññe bhikkhū tassā āpattiyā āpattidiṭṭhino honti.

    but there were other monks who did.

11. 11

    अथa·tha खोkho तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū तंtaṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

    Atha kho te bhikkhū taṁ bhikkhuṁ etadavocuṁ—

    They said to him,

12. 12

    “आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ त्वं,tvaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so आपन्नो,ā·pan·no पस्ससेतंpas·sa·se·taṃ आपत्तिन्”ति?ā·pat·tin

    “āpattiṁ tvaṁ, āvuso, āpanno, passasetaṁ āpattin”ti?

    “You’ve committed an offense. Do you recognize it?”

13. 13

    “नत्थिnat·thi मे,me आवुसो,ā·vu·so आपत्तिā·pat·ti यमहंya·ma·haṃ पस्सेय्यन्”ति।pas·sey·yan

    “Natthi me, āvuso, āpatti yamahaṁ passeyyan”ti.

    “No, I haven’t committed any offense that I should recognize.”

14. 14

    अथa·tha खोkho तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū सामग्गिंsā·mag·giṃ लभित्वाla·bhit·vā तंtaṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā अदस्सनेa·das·sa·ne उक्खिपिंसु।uk·khi·piṃ·su

    Atha kho te bhikkhū sāmaggiṁ labhitvā taṁ bhikkhuṁ āpattiyā adassane ukkhipiṁsu.

    Soon afterwards the monks achieved unanimity, and they ejected that monk for not recognizing the offense.

15. 15

    सोso चca भिक्खुbhik·khu बहुस्सुतोba·hus·su·to होतिho·ti आगतागमोā·ga·tā·ga·mo धम्मधरोdham·ma·dha·ro विनयधरोvi·na·ya·dha·ro मातिकाधरोmā·ti·kā·dha·ro पण्डितोpaṇ·ḍi·to ब्यत्तोbyat·to मेधावीme·dhā·vī लज्जीlaj·jī कुक्कुच्चकोkuk·kuc·ca·ko सिक्खाकामो।sik·khā·kā·mo

    So ca bhikkhu bahussuto hoti āgatāgamo dhammadharo vinayadharo mātikādharo paṇḍito byatto medhāvī lajjī kukkuccako sikkhākāmo.

    But that monk was learned, a master of the tradition; he was an expert on the Teaching, the Monastic Law, and the Key Terms; he was knowledgeable and competent, had a sense of conscience, and was afraid of wrongdoing and fond of the training.

16. 16

    अथa·tha खोkho सोso भिक्खुbhik·khu सन्दिट्ठेsan·diṭ·ṭhe सम्भत्तेsam·bhat·te भिक्खूbhik·khū उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

    Atha kho so bhikkhu sandiṭṭhe sambhatte bhikkhū upasaṅkamitvā etadavoca—

    He went to his friends and said,

17. 17

    “अनापत्तिa·nā·pat·ti एसा,e·sā आवुसो,ā·vu·so नेसाne·sā आपत्ति।ā·pat·ti

    “anāpatti esā, āvuso, nesā āpatti.

    “This isn’t an offense,

18. 18

    अनापन्नोम्हि,a·nā·pan·nom·hi नम्हिnam·hi आपन्नो।ā·pan·no

    Anāpannomhi, namhi āpanno.

    and so I haven’t committed any.

19. 19

    अनुक्खित्तोम्हि,a·nuk·khit·tom·hi नम्हिnam·hi उक्खित्तो।uk·khit·to

    Anukkhittomhi, namhi ukkhitto.

    And I haven’t been ejected,

20. 20

    अधम्मिकेनम्हिa·dham·mi·ke·nam·hi कम्मेनkam·me·na उक्खित्तोuk·khit·to कुप्पेनkup·pe·na अट्ठानारहेन।aṭ·ṭhā·nā·ra·he·na

    Adhammikenamhi kammena ukkhitto kuppena aṭṭhānārahena.

    for the legal procedure was illegitimate, reversible, and unfit to stand.

21. 21

    होथho·tha मेme आयस्मन्तोā·yas·man·to धम्मतोdham·ma·to विनयतोvi·na·ya·to पक्खा”ति।pak·khā

    Hotha me āyasmanto dhammato vinayato pakkhā”ti.

    Please side with me, venerables, in accordance with the Teaching and the Monastic Law.”

22. 22

    अलभिa·la·bhi खोkho सोso भिक्खुbhik·khu सन्दिट्ठेsan·diṭ·ṭhe सम्भत्तेsam·bhat·te भिक्खूbhik·khū पक्खे।pak·khe

    Alabhi kho so bhikkhu sandiṭṭhe sambhatte bhikkhū pakkhe.

    He was able to form a faction.

23. 23

    जानपदानम्पिjā·na·pa·dā·nam·pi सन्दिट्ठानंsan·diṭ·ṭhā·naṃ सम्भत्तानंsam·bhat·tā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke दूतंdū·taṃ पाहेसि—pā·he·si

    Jānapadānampi sandiṭṭhānaṁ sambhattānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ santike dūtaṁ pāhesi—

    He then sent the same message to his friends in the country,

24. 24

    “अनापत्तिa·nā·pat·ti एसा,e·sā आवुसो,ā·vu·so नेसाne·sā आपत्ति।ā·pat·ti

    “anāpatti esā, āvuso, nesā āpatti.

    (Pāli only)

25. 25

    अनापन्नोम्हि,a·nā·pan·nom·hi नम्हिnam·hi आपन्नो।ā·pan·no

    Anāpannomhi, namhi āpanno.

    (Pāli only)

26. 26

    अनुक्खित्तोम्हि,a·nuk·khit·tom·hi नम्हिnam·hi उक्खित्तो।uk·khit·to

    Anukkhittomhi, namhi ukkhitto.

    (Pāli only)

27. 27

    अधम्मिकेनम्हिa·dham·mi·ke·nam·hi कम्मेनkam·me·na उक्खित्तोuk·khit·to कुप्पेनkup·pe·na अट्ठानारहेन।aṭ·ṭhā·nā·ra·he·na

    Adhammikenamhi kammena ukkhitto kuppena aṭṭhānārahena.

    (Pāli only)

28. 28

    होन्तुhon·tu मेme आयस्मन्तोā·yas·man·to धम्मतोdham·ma·to विनयतोvi·na·ya·to पक्खा”ति।pak·khā

    Hontu me āyasmanto dhammato vinayato pakkhā”ti.

    (Pāli only)

29. 29

    अलभिa·la·bhi खोkho सोso भिक्खुbhik·khu जानपदेपिjā·na·pa·de·pi सन्दिट्ठेsan·diṭ·ṭhe सम्भत्तेsam·bhat·te भिक्खूbhik·khū पक्खे।pak·khe

    Alabhi kho so bhikkhu jānapadepi sandiṭṭhe sambhatte bhikkhū pakkhe.

    and again he was able to form a faction.

30. 30

    अथa·tha खोkho तेte उक्खित्तानुवत्तकाuk·khit·tā·nu·vat·ta·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū येनye·na उक्खेपकाuk·khe·pa·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā उक्खेपकेuk·khe·pa·ke भिक्खूbhik·khū एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

    Atha kho te ukkhittānuvattakā bhikkhū yena ukkhepakā bhikkhū tenupasaṅkamiṁsu, upasaṅkamitvā ukkhepake bhikkhū etadavocuṁ—

    The monks who sided with him went to the monks who had ejected him and said,

31. 31

    “अनापत्तिa·nā·pat·ti एसा,e·sā आवुसो,ā·vu·so नेसाne·sā आपत्ति।ā·pat·ti

    “anāpatti esā, āvuso, nesā āpatti.

    “This isn’t an offense,

32. 32

    अनापन्नोa·nā·pan·no एसोe·so भिक्खु,bhik·khu नेसोne·so भिक्खुbhik·khu आपन्नो।ā·pan·no

    Anāpanno eso bhikkhu, neso bhikkhu āpanno.

    and so this monk hasn’t committed any.

33. 33

    अनुक्खित्तोa·nuk·khit·to एसोe·so भिक्खु,bhik·khu नेसोne·so भिक्खुbhik·khu उक्खित्तो।uk·khit·to

    Anukkhitto eso bhikkhu, neso bhikkhu ukkhitto.

    He hasn’t been ejected,

34. 34

    अधम्मिकेनa·dham·mi·ke·na कम्मेनkam·me·na उक्खित्तोuk·khit·to कुप्पेनkup·pe·na अट्ठानारहेना”ति।aṭ·ṭhā·nā·ra·he·nā

    Adhammikena kammena ukkhitto kuppena aṭṭhānārahenā”ti.

    for the legal procedure was illegitimate, reversible, and unfit to stand.”

35. 35

    एवंe·vaṃ वुत्ते,vut·te उक्खेपकाuk·khe·pa·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū उक्खित्तानुवत्तकेuk·khit·tā·nu·vat·ta·ke भिक्खूbhik·khū एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

    Evaṁ vutte, ukkhepakā bhikkhū ukkhittānuvattake bhikkhū etadavocuṁ—

    They replied,

36. 36

    “आपत्तिā·pat·ti एसा,e·sā आवुसो,ā·vu·so नेसाne·sā अनापत्ति।a·nā·pat·ti

    “āpatti esā, āvuso, nesā anāpatti.

    “This is an offense,

37. 37

    आपन्नोā·pan·no एसोe·so भिक्खु,bhik·khu नेसोne·so भिक्खुbhik·khu अनापन्नो।a·nā·pan·no

    Āpanno eso bhikkhu, neso bhikkhu anāpanno.

    and he’s committed it.

38. 38

    उक्खित्तोuk·khit·to एसोe·so भिक्खु,bhik·khu नेसोne·so भिक्खुbhik·khu अनुक्खित्तो।a·nuk·khit·to

    Ukkhitto eso bhikkhu, neso bhikkhu anukkhitto.

    And he’s been ejected.

39. 39

    धम्मिकेनdham·mi·ke·na कम्मेनkam·me·na उक्खित्तोuk·khit·to अकुप्पेनa·kup·pe·na ठानारहेन।ṭhā·nā·ra·he·na

    Dhammikena kammena ukkhitto akuppena ṭhānārahena.

    The legal procedure was legitimate, irreversible, and fit to stand.

40. 40

    माmā खोkho तुम्हेtum·he आयस्मन्तोā·yas·man·to एतंe·taṃ उक्खित्तकंuk·khit·ta·kaṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ अनुवत्तित्थa·nu·vat·tit·tha अनुपरिवारेथा”ति।a·nu·pa·ri·vā·re·thā

    Mā kho tumhe āyasmanto etaṁ ukkhittakaṁ bhikkhuṁ anuvattittha anuparivārethā”ti.

    Venerables, don’t side with this monk.”

41. 41

    एवम्पिe·vam·pi खोkho तेte उक्खित्तानुवत्तकाuk·khit·tā·nu·vat·ta·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū उक्खेपकेहिuk·khe·pa·ke·hi भिक्खूहिbhik·khū·hi वुच्चमानाvuc·ca·mā·nā तथेवta·the·va तंtaṃ उक्खित्तकंuk·khit·ta·kaṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ अनुवत्तिंसुa·nu·vat·tiṃ·su अनुपरिवारेसुं।a·nu·pa·ri·vā·re·suṃ

    Evampi kho te ukkhittānuvattakā bhikkhū ukkhepakehi bhikkhūhi vuccamānā tatheva taṁ ukkhittakaṁ bhikkhuṁ anuvattiṁsu anuparivāresuṁ.

    But they still sided with him.

42. 42

    अथa·tha खोkho अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

    Atha kho aññataro bhikkhu yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

    Soon afterwards a certain monk went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down,

43. 43

    एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नोni·sin·no खोkho सोso भिक्खुbhik·khu भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

    Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho so bhikkhu bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

    and told him all that had happened.

44. 44

    “इध,i·dha भन्ते,bhan·te अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपन्नोā·pan·no अहोसि।a·ho·si

    “idha, bhante, aññataro bhikkhu āpattiṁ āpanno ahosi.

    (Pāli only)

45. 45

    सोso तस्साtas·sā आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā आपत्तिदिट्ठिā·pat·ti·diṭ·ṭhi अहोसि,a·ho·si अञ्ञेañ·ñe भिक्खूbhik·khū तस्साtas·sā आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā अनापत्तिदिट्ठिनोa·nā·pat·ti·diṭ·ṭhi·no अहेसुं।a·he·suṃ

    So tassā āpattiyā āpattidiṭṭhi ahosi, aññe bhikkhū tassā āpattiyā anāpattidiṭṭhino ahesuṁ.

    (Pāli only)

46. 46

    सोso अपरेनa·pa·re·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na तस्साtas·sā आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā अनापत्तिदिट्ठिa·nā·pat·ti·diṭ·ṭhi अहोसि,a·ho·si अञ्ञेañ·ñe भिक्खूbhik·khū तस्साtas·sā आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā आपत्तिदिट्ठिनोā·pat·ti·diṭ·ṭhi·no अहेसुं।a·he·suṃ

    So aparena samayena tassā āpattiyā anāpattidiṭṭhi ahosi, aññe bhikkhū tassā āpattiyā āpattidiṭṭhino ahesuṁ.

    (Pāli only)

47. 47

    अथa·tha खोkho ते,te भन्ते,bhan·te भिक्खूbhik·khū तंtaṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

    Atha kho te, bhante, bhikkhū taṁ bhikkhuṁ etadavocuṁ—

    (Pāli only)

48. 48

    ‘आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ त्वं,tvaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so आपन्नो,ā·pan·no पस्ससेतंpas·sa·se·taṃ आपत्तिन्’ति?ā·pat·tin

    ‘āpattiṁ tvaṁ, āvuso, āpanno, passasetaṁ āpattin’ti?

    (Pāli only)

49. 49

    ‘नत्थिnat·thi मे,me आवुसो,ā·vu·so आपत्तिā·pat·ti यमहंya·ma·haṃ पस्सेय्यन्’ति।pas·sey·yan

    ‘Natthi me, āvuso, āpatti yamahaṁ passeyyan’ti.

    (Pāli only)

50. 50

    अथa·tha खोkho ते,te भन्ते,bhan·te भिक्खूbhik·khū सामग्गिंsā·mag·giṃ लभित्वाla·bhit·vā तंtaṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā अदस्सनेa·das·sa·ne उक्खिपिंसु।uk·khi·piṃ·su

    Atha kho te, bhante, bhikkhū sāmaggiṁ labhitvā taṁ bhikkhuṁ āpattiyā adassane ukkhipiṁsu.

    (Pāli only)

51. 51

    सोso च,ca भन्ते,bhan·te भिक्खुbhik·khu बहुस्सुतोba·hus·su·to आगतागमोā·ga·tā·ga·mo धम्मधरोdham·ma·dha·ro विनयधरोvi·na·ya·dha·ro मातिकाधरोmā·ti·kā·dha·ro पण्डितोpaṇ·ḍi·to ब्यत्तोbyat·to मेधावीme·dhā·vī लज्जीlaj·jī कुक्कुच्चकोkuk·kuc·ca·ko सिक्खाकामो।sik·khā·kā·mo

    So ca, bhante, bhikkhu bahussuto āgatāgamo dhammadharo vinayadharo mātikādharo paṇḍito byatto medhāvī lajjī kukkuccako sikkhākāmo.

    (Pāli only)

52. 52

    अथa·tha खोkho सो,so भन्ते,bhan·te भिक्खुbhik·khu सन्दिट्ठेsan·diṭ·ṭhe सम्भत्तेsam·bhat·te भिक्खूbhik·khū उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

    Atha kho so, bhante, bhikkhu sandiṭṭhe sambhatte bhikkhū upasaṅkamitvā etadavoca—

    (Pāli only)

53. 53

    ‘अनापत्तिa·nā·pat·ti एसा,e·sā आवुसो;ā·vu·so

    ‘anāpatti esā, āvuso;

    (Pāli only)

54. 54

    नेसाne·sā आपत्ति।ā·pat·ti

    nesā āpatti.

    (Pāli only)

55. 55

    अनापन्नोम्हि,a·nā·pan·nom·hi नम्हिnam·hi आपन्नो।ā·pan·no

    Anāpannomhi, namhi āpanno.

    (Pāli only)

56. 56

    अनुक्खित्तोम्हि,a·nuk·khit·tom·hi नम्हिnam·hi उक्खित्तो।uk·khit·to

    Anukkhittomhi, namhi ukkhitto.

    (Pāli only)

57. 57

    अधम्मिकेनम्हिa·dham·mi·ke·nam·hi कम्मेनkam·me·na उक्खित्तोuk·khit·to कुप्पेनkup·pe·na अट्ठानारहेन।aṭ·ṭhā·nā·ra·he·na

    Adhammikenamhi kammena ukkhitto kuppena aṭṭhānārahena.

    (Pāli only)

58. 58

    होथho·tha मेme आयस्मन्तोā·yas·man·to धम्मतोdham·ma·to विनयतोvi·na·ya·to पक्खा’ति।pak·khā

    Hotha me āyasmanto dhammato vinayato pakkhā’ti.

    (Pāli only)

59. 59

    अलभिa·la·bhi खोkho सो,so भन्ते,bhan·te भिक्खुbhik·khu सन्दिट्ठेsan·diṭ·ṭhe सम्भत्तेsam·bhat·te भिक्खूbhik·khū पक्खे।pak·khe

    Alabhi kho so, bhante, bhikkhu sandiṭṭhe sambhatte bhikkhū pakkhe.

    (Pāli only)

60. 60

    जानपदानम्पिjā·na·pa·dā·nam·pi सन्दिट्ठानंsan·diṭ·ṭhā·naṃ सम्भत्तानंsam·bhat·tā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke दूतंdū·taṃ पाहेसि—pā·he·si

    Jānapadānampi sandiṭṭhānaṁ sambhattānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ santike dūtaṁ pāhesi—

    (Pāli only)

61. 61

    ‘अनापत्तिa·nā·pat·ti एसा,e·sā आवुसो;ā·vu·so

    ‘anāpatti esā, āvuso;

    (Pāli only)

62. 62

    नेसाne·sā आपत्ति।ā·pat·ti

    nesā āpatti.

    (Pāli only)

63. 63

    अनापन्नोम्हि,a·nā·pan·nom·hi नम्हिnam·hi आपन्नो।ā·pan·no

    Anāpannomhi, namhi āpanno.

    (Pāli only)

64. 64

    अनुक्खित्तोम्हि,a·nuk·khit·tom·hi नम्हिnam·hi उक्खित्तो।uk·khit·to

    Anukkhittomhi, namhi ukkhitto.

    (Pāli only)

65. 65

    अधम्मिकेनम्हिa·dham·mi·ke·nam·hi कम्मेनkam·me·na उक्खित्तोuk·khit·to कुप्पेनkup·pe·na अट्ठानारहेन।aṭ·ṭhā·nā·ra·he·na

    Adhammikenamhi kammena ukkhitto kuppena aṭṭhānārahena.

    (Pāli only)

66. 66

    होन्तुhon·tu मेme आयस्मन्तोā·yas·man·to धम्मतोdham·ma·to विनयतोvi·na·ya·to पक्खा’ति।pak·khā

    Hontu me āyasmanto dhammato vinayato pakkhā’ti.

    (Pāli only)

67. 67

    अलभिa·la·bhi खोkho सो,so भन्ते,bhan·te भिक्खुbhik·khu जानपदेपिjā·na·pa·de·pi सन्दिट्ठेsan·diṭ·ṭhe सम्भत्तेsam·bhat·te भिक्खूbhik·khū पक्खे।pak·khe

    Alabhi kho so, bhante, bhikkhu jānapadepi sandiṭṭhe sambhatte bhikkhū pakkhe.

    (Pāli only)

68. 68

    अथa·tha खोkho ते,te भन्ते,bhan·te उक्खित्तानुवत्तकाuk·khit·tā·nu·vat·ta·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū येनye·na उक्खेपकाuk·khe·pa·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā उक्खेपकेuk·khe·pa·ke भिक्खूbhik·khū एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

    Atha kho te, bhante, ukkhittānuvattakā bhikkhū yena ukkhepakā bhikkhū tenupasaṅkamiṁsu, upasaṅkamitvā ukkhepake bhikkhū etadavocuṁ—

    (Pāli only)

69. 69

    ‘अनापत्तिa·nā·pat·ti एसा,e·sā आवुसो;ā·vu·so

    ‘anāpatti esā, āvuso;

    (Pāli only)

70. 70

    नेसाne·sā आपत्ति।ā·pat·ti

    nesā āpatti.

    (Pāli only)

71. 71

    अनापन्नोa·nā·pan·no एसोe·so भिक्खु,bhik·khu नेसोne·so भिक्खुbhik·khu आपन्नो।ā·pan·no

    Anāpanno eso bhikkhu, neso bhikkhu āpanno.

    (Pāli only)

72. 72

    अनुक्खित्तोa·nuk·khit·to एसोe·so भिक्खु,bhik·khu नेसोne·so भिक्खुbhik·khu उक्खित्तो।uk·khit·to

    Anukkhitto eso bhikkhu, neso bhikkhu ukkhitto.

    (Pāli only)

73. 73

    अधम्मिकेनa·dham·mi·ke·na कम्मेनkam·me·na उक्खित्तोuk·khit·to कुप्पेनkup·pe·na अट्ठानारहेना’ति।aṭ·ṭhā·nā·ra·he·nā

    Adhammikena kammena ukkhitto kuppena aṭṭhānārahenā’ti.

    (Pāli only)

74. 74

    एवंe·vaṃ वुत्ते,vut·te ते,te भन्ते,bhan·te उक्खेपकाuk·khe·pa·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū उक्खित्तानुवत्तकेuk·khit·tā·nu·vat·ta·ke भिक्खूbhik·khū एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

    Evaṁ vutte, te, bhante, ukkhepakā bhikkhū ukkhittānuvattake bhikkhū etadavocuṁ—

    (Pāli only)

75. 75

    ‘आपत्तिā·pat·ti एसा,e·sā आवुसो;ā·vu·so

    ‘āpatti esā, āvuso;

    (Pāli only)

76. 76

    नेसाne·sā अनापत्ति।a·nā·pat·ti

    nesā anāpatti.

    (Pāli only)

77. 77

    आपन्नोā·pan·no एसोe·so भिक्खु,bhik·khu नेसोne·so भिक्खुbhik·khu अनापन्नो।a·nā·pan·no

    Āpanno eso bhikkhu, neso bhikkhu anāpanno.

    (Pāli only)

78. 78

    उक्खित्तोuk·khit·to एसोe·so भिक्खु,bhik·khu नेसोne·so भिक्खुbhik·khu अनुक्खित्तो।a·nuk·khit·to

    Ukkhitto eso bhikkhu, neso bhikkhu anukkhitto.

    (Pāli only)

79. 79

    धम्मिकेनdham·mi·ke·na कम्मेनkam·me·na उक्खित्तोuk·khit·to अकुप्पेनa·kup·pe·na ठानारहेन।ṭhā·nā·ra·he·na

    Dhammikena kammena ukkhitto akuppena ṭhānārahena.

    (Pāli only)

80. 80

    माmā खोkho तुम्हेtum·he आयस्मन्तोā·yas·man·to एतंe·taṃ उक्खित्तकंuk·khit·ta·kaṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ अनुवत्तित्थa·nu·vat·tit·tha अनुपरिवारेथा’ति।a·nu·pa·ri·vā·re·thā

    Mā kho tumhe āyasmanto etaṁ ukkhittakaṁ bhikkhuṁ anuvattittha anuparivārethā’ti.

    (Pāli only)

81. 81

    एवम्पिe·vam·pi खोkho ते,te भन्ते,bhan·te उक्खित्तानुवत्तकाuk·khit·tā·nu·vat·ta·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū उक्खेपकेहिuk·khe·pa·ke·hi भिक्खूहिbhik·khū·hi वुच्चमानाvuc·ca·mā·nā तथेवta·the·va तंtaṃ उक्खित्तकंuk·khit·ta·kaṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ अनुवत्तन्तिa·nu·vat·tan·ti अनुपरिवारेन्ती”ति।a·nu·pa·ri·vā·ren·tī

    Evampi kho te, bhante, ukkhittānuvattakā bhikkhū ukkhepakehi bhikkhūhi vuccamānā tatheva taṁ ukkhittakaṁ bhikkhuṁ anuvattanti anuparivārentī”ti.

    (Pāli only)

82. 82

    अथa·tha खोkho भगवा—“भिन्नोbha·ga·vā भिक्खुसङ्घो,bhik·khu·saṅ·gho भिन्नोbhin·no भिक्खुसङ्घो”ति—bhik·khu·saṅ·gho

    Atha kho bhagavā—“bhinno bhikkhusaṅgho, bhinno bhikkhusaṅgho”ti—

    Realizing that the Sangha of monks was divided, the Buddha

83. 83

    उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā येनye·na उक्खेपकाuk·khe·pa·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā पञ्ञत्तेpañ·ñat·te आसनेā·sa·ne निसीदि,ni·sī·di निसज्जni·saj·ja खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā उक्खेपकेuk·khe·pa·ke भिक्खूbhik·khū एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

    uṭṭhāyāsanā yena ukkhepakā bhikkhū tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi, nisajja kho bhagavā ukkhepake bhikkhū etadavoca—

    got up from his seat, went to those monks who had done the ejection, and sat down on the prepared seat. He then said to those monks:

84. 84

    “माmā खोkho तुम्हे,tum·he भिक्खवे—‘पटिभातिbhik·kha·ve नो,no पटिभातिpa·ṭi·bhā·ti नो’ति—यस्मिंno वाvā तस्मिंtas·miṃ वाvā भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ उक्खिपितब्बंuk·khi·pi·tab·baṃ मञ्ञित्थ।mañ·ñit·tha

    “mā kho tumhe, bhikkhave—‘paṭibhāti no, paṭibhāti no’ti—yasmiṁ vā tasmiṁ vā bhikkhuṁ ukkhipitabbaṁ maññittha.

    “Don’t just eject a monk for any kind of offense merely because it seems clear to you that he’s committed it.

85. 85

    इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपन्नोā·pan·no होति।ho·ti

    Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu āpattiṁ āpanno hoti.

    It may be that a monk has committed an offense.

86. 86

    सोso तस्साtas·sā आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā अनापत्तिदिट्ठिa·nā·pat·ti·diṭ·ṭhi होति,ho·ti अञ्ञेañ·ñe भिक्खूbhik·khū तस्साtas·sā आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā आपत्तिदिट्ठिनोā·pat·ti·diṭ·ṭhi·no होन्ति।hon·ti

    So tassā āpattiyā anāpattidiṭṭhi hoti, aññe bhikkhū tassā āpattiyā āpattidiṭṭhino honti.

    He doesn’t regard it as an offense, but there are other monks who do.

87. 87

    तेte चे,ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूbhik·khū तंtaṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ एवंe·vaṃ जानन्ति—‘अयंjā·nan·ti खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā बहुस्सुतोba·hus·su·to आगतागमोā·ga·tā·ga·mo धम्मधरोdham·ma·dha·ro विनयधरोvi·na·ya·dha·ro मातिकाधरोmā·ti·kā·dha·ro पण्डितोpaṇ·ḍi·to ब्यत्तोbyat·to मेधावीme·dhā·vī लज्जीlaj·jī कुक्कुच्चकोkuk·kuc·ca·ko सिक्खाकामो।sik·khā·kā·mo

    Te ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhū taṁ bhikkhuṁ evaṁ jānanti—‘ayaṁ kho āyasmā bahussuto āgatāgamo dhammadharo vinayadharo mātikādharo paṇḍito byatto medhāvī lajjī kukkuccako sikkhākāmo.

    If they know, ‘This monk is learned and a master of the tradition; he’s an expert on the Teaching, the Monastic Law, and the Key Terms; he’s knowledgeable and competent, has a sense of conscience, and is afraid of wrongdoing and fond of the training.

88. 88

    सचेsa·ce मयंma·yaṃ इमंi·maṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā अदस्सनेa·das·sa·ne उक्खिपिस्साम,uk·khi·pis·sā·ma नna मयंma·yaṃ इमिनाi·mi·nā भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ उपोसथंu·po·sa·thaṃ करिस्साम,ka·ris·sā·ma विनाvi·nā इमिनाi·mi·nā भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā उपोसथंu·po·sa·thaṃ करिस्साम,ka·ris·sā·ma भविस्सतिbha·vis·sa·ti सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa ततोनिदानंta·to·ni·dā·naṃ भण्डनंbhaṇ·ḍa·naṃ कलहोka·la·ho विग्गहोvig·ga·ho विवादोvi·vā·do सङ्घभेदोsaṅ·gha·bhe·do सङ्घराजिsaṅ·gha·rā·ji सङ्घववत्थानंsaṅ·gha·va·vat·thā·naṃ सङ्घनानाकरणन्’ति,saṅ·gha·nā·nā·ka·ra·ṇan भेदगरुकेहि,bhe·da·ga·ru·ke·hi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूहिbhik·khū·hi नna सोso भिक्खुbhik·khu आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā अदस्सनेa·das·sa·ne उक्खिपितब्बो।uk·khi·pi·tab·bo

    Sace mayaṁ imaṁ bhikkhuṁ āpattiyā adassane ukkhipissāma, na mayaṁ iminā bhikkhunā saddhiṁ uposathaṁ karissāma, vinā iminā bhikkhunā uposathaṁ karissāma, bhavissati saṅghassa tatonidānaṁ bhaṇḍanaṁ kalaho viggaho vivādo saṅghabhedo saṅgharāji saṅghavavatthānaṁ saṅghanānākaraṇan’ti, bhedagarukehi, bhikkhave, bhikkhūhi na so bhikkhu āpattiyā adassane ukkhipitabbo.

    If we eject him for not recognizing an offense, we won’t be able to do the observance-day ceremony with him. Because of this, there’ll be arguments and disputes in the Sangha; there’ll be schism, fracture, and separation in the Sangha,’ and if they understand the gravity of schism, they shouldn’t eject that monk.

89. 89

    इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपन्नोā·pan·no होति।ho·ti

    Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu āpattiṁ āpanno hoti.

    It may be that a monk has committed an offense.

90. 90

    सोso तस्साtas·sā आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā अनापत्तिदिट्ठिa·nā·pat·ti·diṭ·ṭhi होति,ho·ti अञ्ञेañ·ñe भिक्खूbhik·khū तस्साtas·sā आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā आपत्तिदिट्ठिनोā·pat·ti·diṭ·ṭhi·no होन्ति।hon·ti

    So tassā āpattiyā anāpattidiṭṭhi hoti, aññe bhikkhū tassā āpattiyā āpattidiṭṭhino honti.

    He doesn’t regard it as an offense, but there are other monks who do.

91. 91

    तेte चे,ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूbhik·khū तंtaṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ एवंe·vaṃ जानन्ति—‘अयंjā·nan·ti खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā बहुस्सुतोba·hus·su·to आगतागमोā·ga·tā·ga·mo धम्मधरोdham·ma·dha·ro विनयधरोvi·na·ya·dha·ro मातिकाधरोmā·ti·kā·dha·ro पण्डितोpaṇ·ḍi·to ब्यत्तोbyat·to मेधावीme·dhā·vī लज्जीlaj·jī कुक्कुच्चकोkuk·kuc·ca·ko सिक्खाकामो।sik·khā·kā·mo

    Te ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhū taṁ bhikkhuṁ evaṁ jānanti—‘ayaṁ kho āyasmā bahussuto āgatāgamo dhammadharo vinayadharo mātikādharo paṇḍito byatto medhāvī lajjī kukkuccako sikkhākāmo.

    If they know, ‘This monk is learned and a master of the tradition; he’s an expert on the Teaching, the Monastic Law, and the Key Terms; he’s knowledgeable and competent, has a sense of conscience, and is afraid of wrongdoing and fond of the training.

92. 92

    सचेsa·ce मयंma·yaṃ इमंi·maṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā अदस्सनेa·das·sa·ne उक्खिपिस्साम,uk·khi·pis·sā·ma नna मयंma·yaṃ इमिनाi·mi·nā भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ पवारेस्साम,pa·vā·res·sā·ma विनाvi·nā इमिनाi·mi·nā भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā पवारेस्साम।pa·vā·res·sā·ma

    Sace mayaṁ imaṁ bhikkhuṁ āpattiyā adassane ukkhipissāma, na mayaṁ iminā bhikkhunā saddhiṁ pavāressāma, vinā iminā bhikkhunā pavāressāma.

    If we eject him for not recognizing an offense, we won’t be able to do the invitation ceremony with him;

93. 93

    नna मयंma·yaṃ इमिनाi·mi·nā भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ सङ्घकम्मंsaṅ·gha·kam·maṃ करिस्साम,ka·ris·sā·ma विनाvi·nā इमिनाi·mi·nā भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā सङ्घकम्मंsaṅ·gha·kam·maṃ करिस्साम।ka·ris·sā·ma

    Na mayaṁ iminā bhikkhunā saddhiṁ saṅghakammaṁ karissāma, vinā iminā bhikkhunā saṅghakammaṁ karissāma.

    we won’t be able to do legal procedures with him;

94. 94

    नna मयंma·yaṃ इमिनाi·mi·nā भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ आसनेā·sa·ne निसीदिस्साम,ni·sī·dis·sā·ma विनाvi·nā इमिनाi·mi·nā भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā आसनेā·sa·ne निसीदिस्साम।ni·sī·dis·sā·ma

    Na mayaṁ iminā bhikkhunā saddhiṁ āsane nisīdissāma, vinā iminā bhikkhunā āsane nisīdissāma.

    we won’t share a seat with him;

95. 95

    नna मयंma·yaṃ इमिनाi·mi·nā भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ यागुपानेyā·gu·pā·ne निसीदिस्साम,ni·sī·dis·sā·ma विनाvi·nā इमिनाi·mi·nā भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā यागुपानेyā·gu·pā·ne निसीदिस्साम।ni·sī·dis·sā·ma

    Na mayaṁ iminā bhikkhunā saddhiṁ yāgupāne nisīdissāma, vinā iminā bhikkhunā yāgupāne nisīdissāma.

    we won’t drink congee with him;

96. 96

    नna मयंma·yaṃ इमिनाi·mi·nā भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ भत्तग्गेbhat·tag·ge निसीदिस्साम,ni·sī·dis·sā·ma विनाvi·nā इमिनाi·mi·nā भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā भत्तग्गेbhat·tag·ge निसीदिस्साम।ni·sī·dis·sā·ma

    Na mayaṁ iminā bhikkhunā saddhiṁ bhattagge nisīdissāma, vinā iminā bhikkhunā bhattagge nisīdissāma.

    we won’t sit in the dining hall with him;

97. 97

    नna मयंma·yaṃ इमिनाi·mi·nā भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ एकच्छन्नेe·kac·chan·ne वसिस्साम,va·sis·sā·ma विनाvi·nā इमिनाi·mi·nā भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā एकच्छन्नेe·kac·chan·ne वसिस्साम।va·sis·sā·ma

    Na mayaṁ iminā bhikkhunā saddhiṁ ekacchanne vasissāma, vinā iminā bhikkhunā ekacchanne vasissāma.

    we won’t stay in the same room with him;

98. 98

    नna मयंma·yaṃ इमिनाi·mi·nā भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ यथावुड्ढंya·thā·vuḍ·ḍhaṃ अभिवादनंa·bhi·vā·da·naṃ पच्चुट्ठानंpac·cuṭ·ṭhā·naṃ अञ्जलिकम्मंañ·ja·li·kam·maṃ सामीचिकम्मंsā·mī·ci·kam·maṃ करिस्साम,ka·ris·sā·ma विनाvi·nā इमिनाi·mi·nā भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā यथावुड्ढंya·thā·vuḍ·ḍhaṃ अभिवादनंa·bhi·vā·da·naṃ पच्चुट्ठानंpac·cuṭ·ṭhā·naṃ अञ्जलिकम्मंañ·ja·li·kam·maṃ सामीचिकम्मंsā·mī·ci·kam·maṃ करिस्साम।ka·ris·sā·ma

    Na mayaṁ iminā bhikkhunā saddhiṁ yathāvuḍḍhaṁ abhivādanaṁ paccuṭṭhānaṁ añjalikammaṁ sāmīcikammaṁ karissāma, vinā iminā bhikkhunā yathāvuḍḍhaṁ abhivādanaṁ paccuṭṭhānaṁ añjalikammaṁ sāmīcikammaṁ karissāma.

    we won’t bow down, stand up, raise our joined palms, or do acts of respect toward one another according to seniority.

99. 99

    भविस्सतिbha·vis·sa·ti सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa ततोनिदानंta·to·ni·dā·naṃ भण्डनंbhaṇ·ḍa·naṃ कलहोka·la·ho विग्गहोvig·ga·ho विवादोvi·vā·do सङ्घभेदोsaṅ·gha·bhe·do सङ्घराजिsaṅ·gha·rā·ji सङ्घववत्थानंsaṅ·gha·va·vat·thā·naṃ सङ्घनानाकरणन्’ति,saṅ·gha·nā·nā·ka·ra·ṇan भेदगरुकेहि,bhe·da·ga·ru·ke·hi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूहिbhik·khū·hi नna सोso भिक्खुbhik·khu आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā अदस्सनेa·das·sa·ne उक्खिपितब्बो”ति।uk·khi·pi·tab·bo

    Bhavissati saṅghassa tatonidānaṁ bhaṇḍanaṁ kalaho viggaho vivādo saṅghabhedo saṅgharāji saṅghavavatthānaṁ saṅghanānākaraṇan’ti, bhedagarukehi, bhikkhave, bhikkhūhi na so bhikkhu āpattiyā adassane ukkhipitabbo”ti.

    Because of this, there’ll be arguments and disputes in the Sangha; there’ll be schism, fracture, and separation in the Sangha,’ and if they understand the gravity of schism, they shouldn’t eject that monk.”

100. 100

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā उक्खेपकानंuk·khe·pa·kā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ भासित्वाbhā·sit·vā उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā येनye·na उक्खित्तानुवत्तकाuk·khit·tā·nu·vat·ta·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā पञ्ञत्तेpañ·ñat·te आसनेā·sa·ne निसीदि,ni·sī·di निसज्जni·saj·ja खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā उक्खित्तानुवत्तकेuk·khit·tā·nu·vat·ta·ke भिक्खूbhik·khū एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho bhagavā ukkhepakānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ etamatthaṁ bhāsitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā yena ukkhittānuvattakā bhikkhū tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi, nisajja kho bhagavā ukkhittānuvattake bhikkhū etadavoca—

     The Buddha got up from his seat, went to those monks who were siding with the ejected monk, and sat down on the prepared seat. He then said to those monks:

101. 101

     “माmā खोkho तुम्हे,tum·he भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जित्वाā·paj·jit·vā ‘नाम्हnām·ha आपन्ना,ā·pan·nā नाम्हnām·ha आपन्ना’तिā·pan·nā आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ नna पटिकातब्बंpa·ṭi·kā·tab·baṃ मञ्ञित्थ।mañ·ñit·tha

     “mā kho tumhe, bhikkhave, āpattiṁ āpajjitvā ‘nāmha āpannā, nāmha āpannā’ti āpattiṁ na paṭikātabbaṁ maññittha.

     “If you’ve committed an offense, don’t refuse to make amends for it just because you think that you haven’t committed it.

102. 102

     इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपन्नोā·pan·no होति।ho·ti

     Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu āpattiṁ āpanno hoti.

     It may be that a monk has committed an offense.

103. 103

     सोso तस्साtas·sā आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā अनापत्तिदिट्ठिa·nā·pat·ti·diṭ·ṭhi होति,ho·ti अञ्ञेañ·ñe भिक्खूbhik·khū तस्साtas·sā आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā आपत्तिदिट्ठिनोā·pat·ti·diṭ·ṭhi·no होन्ति।hon·ti

     So tassā āpattiyā anāpattidiṭṭhi hoti, aññe bhikkhū tassā āpattiyā āpattidiṭṭhino honti.

     He doesn’t regard it as an offense, but there are other monks who do.

104. 104

     सोso चे,ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū एवंe·vaṃ जानाति—‘इमेjā·nā·ti खोkho आयस्मन्तोā·yas·man·to बहुस्सुताba·hus·su·tā आगतागमाā·ga·tā·ga·mā धम्मधराdham·ma·dha·rā विनयधराvi·na·ya·dha·rā मातिकाधराmā·ti·kā·dha·rā पण्डिताpaṇ·ḍi·tā ब्यत्ताbyat·tā मेधाविनोme·dhā·vi·no लज्जिनोlaj·ji·no कुक्कुच्चकाkuk·kuc·ca·kā सिक्खाकामा,sik·khā·kā·mā नालंnā·laṃ ममंma·maṃ वाvā कारणाkā·ra·ṇā अञ्ञेसंañ·ñe·saṃ वाvā कारणाkā·ra·ṇā छन्दाchan·dā दोसाdo·sā मोहाmo·hā भयाbha·yā अगतिंa·ga·tiṃ गन्तुं।gan·tuṃ

     So ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu te bhikkhū evaṁ jānāti—‘ime kho āyasmanto bahussutā āgatāgamā dhammadharā vinayadharā mātikādharā paṇḍitā byattā medhāvino lajjino kukkuccakā sikkhākāmā, nālaṁ mamaṁ vā kāraṇā aññesaṁ vā kāraṇā chandā dosā mohā bhayā agatiṁ gantuṁ.

     If he knows, ‘These monks are learned and masters of the tradition; they’re experts on the Teaching, the Monastic Law, and the Key Terms; they’re knowledgeable and competent, have a sense of conscience, and are afraid of wrongdoing and fond of the training. They’re unlikely, because of me or anyone else, to act wrongly out of favoritism, ill will, confusion, or fear.

105. 105

     सचेsa·ce मंmaṃ इमेi·me भिक्खूbhik·khū आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā अदस्सनेa·das·sa·ne उक्खिपिस्सन्ति,uk·khi·pis·san·ti नna मयाma·yā सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ उपोसथंu·po·sa·thaṃ करिस्सन्ति,ka·ris·san·ti विनाvi·nā मयाma·yā उपोसथंu·po·sa·thaṃ करिस्सन्ति,ka·ris·san·ti भविस्सतिbha·vis·sa·ti सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa ततोनिदानंta·to·ni·dā·naṃ भण्डनंbhaṇ·ḍa·naṃ कलहोka·la·ho विग्गहोvig·ga·ho विवादोvi·vā·do सङ्घभेदोsaṅ·gha·bhe·do सङ्घराजिsaṅ·gha·rā·ji सङ्घववत्थानंsaṅ·gha·va·vat·thā·naṃ सङ्घनानाकरणन्’ति,saṅ·gha·nā·nā·ka·ra·ṇan भेदगरुकेन,bhe·da·ga·ru·ke·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā परेसम्पिpa·re·sam·pi सद्धायsad·dhā·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti देसेतब्बा।de·se·tab·bā

     Sace maṁ ime bhikkhū āpattiyā adassane ukkhipissanti, na mayā saddhiṁ uposathaṁ karissanti, vinā mayā uposathaṁ karissanti, bhavissati saṅghassa tatonidānaṁ bhaṇḍanaṁ kalaho viggaho vivādo saṅghabhedo saṅgharāji saṅghavavatthānaṁ saṅghanānākaraṇan’ti, bhedagarukena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā paresampi saddhāya āpatti desetabbā.

     And if these monks eject me for not recognizing an offense, they won’t be able do the observance-day ceremony with me. Because of this, there’ll be arguments and disputes in the Sangha; there’ll be schism, fracture, and separation in the Sangha,’ and if he understands the gravity of schism, he should confess the offense even out of confidence in the others.

106. 106

     इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपन्नोā·pan·no होति।ho·ti

     Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu āpattiṁ āpanno hoti.

     It may be that a monk has committed an offense.

107. 107

     सोso तस्साtas·sā आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā अनापत्तिदिट्ठिa·nā·pat·ti·diṭ·ṭhi होति,ho·ti अञ्ञेañ·ñe भिक्खूbhik·khū तस्साtas·sā आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā आपत्तिदिट्ठिनोā·pat·ti·diṭ·ṭhi·no होन्ति।hon·ti

     So tassā āpattiyā anāpattidiṭṭhi hoti, aññe bhikkhū tassā āpattiyā āpattidiṭṭhino honti.

     He doesn’t regard it as an offense, but there are other monks who do.

108. 108

     सोso चे,ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū एवंe·vaṃ जानाति—‘इमेjā·nā·ti खोkho आयस्मन्तोā·yas·man·to बहुस्सुताba·hus·su·tā आगतागमाā·ga·tā·ga·mā धम्मधराdham·ma·dha·rā विनयधराvi·na·ya·dha·rā मातिकाधराmā·ti·kā·dha·rā पण्डिताpaṇ·ḍi·tā ब्यत्ताbyat·tā मेधाविनोme·dhā·vi·no लज्जिनोlaj·ji·no कुक्कुच्चकाkuk·kuc·ca·kā सिक्खाकामा,sik·khā·kā·mā नालंnā·laṃ ममंma·maṃ वाvā कारणाkā·ra·ṇā अञ्ञेसंañ·ñe·saṃ वाvā कारणाkā·ra·ṇā छन्दाchan·dā दोसाdo·sā मोहाmo·hā भयाbha·yā अगतिंa·ga·tiṃ गन्तुं।gan·tuṃ

     So ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu te bhikkhū evaṁ jānāti—‘ime kho āyasmanto bahussutā āgatāgamā dhammadharā vinayadharā mātikādharā paṇḍitā byattā medhāvino lajjino kukkuccakā sikkhākāmā, nālaṁ mamaṁ vā kāraṇā aññesaṁ vā kāraṇā chandā dosā mohā bhayā agatiṁ gantuṁ.

     If he knows, ‘These monks are learned and masters of the tradition; they’re experts on the Teaching, the Monastic Law, and the Key Terms; they’re knowledgeable and competent, have a sense of conscience, and are afraid of wrongdoing and fond of the training. They’re unlikely, because of me or anyone else, to act wrongly out of favoritism, ill will, confusion, or fear.

109. 109

     सचेsa·ce मंmaṃ इमेi·me भिक्खूbhik·khū आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā अदस्सनेa·das·sa·ne उक्खिपिस्सन्ति,uk·khi·pis·san·ti नna मयाma·yā सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ पवारेस्सन्ति,pa·vā·res·san·ti विनाvi·nā मयाma·yā पवारेस्सन्ति।pa·vā·res·san·ti

     Sace maṁ ime bhikkhū āpattiyā adassane ukkhipissanti, na mayā saddhiṁ pavāressanti, vinā mayā pavāressanti.

     And if these monks eject me for not recognizing an offense, they won’t be able to do the invitation ceremony with me;

110. 110

     नna मयाma·yā सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ सङ्घकम्मंsaṅ·gha·kam·maṃ करिस्सन्ति,ka·ris·san·ti विनाvi·nā मयाma·yā सङ्घकम्मंsaṅ·gha·kam·maṃ करिस्सन्ति।ka·ris·san·ti

     Na mayā saddhiṁ saṅghakammaṁ karissanti, vinā mayā saṅghakammaṁ karissanti.

     they won’t be able to do legal procedures with me;

111. 111

     नna मयाma·yā सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ आसनेā·sa·ne निसीदिस्सन्ति,ni·sī·dis·san·ti विनाvi·nā मयाma·yā आसनेā·sa·ne निसीदिस्सन्ति।ni·sī·dis·san·ti

     Na mayā saddhiṁ āsane nisīdissanti, vinā mayā āsane nisīdissanti.

     they won’t share a seat with me;

112. 112

     नna मयाma·yā सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ यागुपानेyā·gu·pā·ne निसीदिस्सन्ति,ni·sī·dis·san·ti विनाvi·nā मयाma·yā यागुपानेyā·gu·pā·ne निसीदिस्सन्ति।ni·sī·dis·san·ti

     Na mayā saddhiṁ yāgupāne nisīdissanti, vinā mayā yāgupāne nisīdissanti.

     they won’t drink congee with me;

113. 113

     नna मयाma·yā सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ भत्तग्गेbhat·tag·ge निसीदिस्सन्तिni·sī·dis·san·ti विनाvi·nā मयाma·yā भत्तग्गेbhat·tag·ge निसीदिस्सन्ति।ni·sī·dis·san·ti

     Na mayā saddhiṁ bhattagge nisīdissanti vinā mayā bhattagge nisīdissanti.

     they won’t sit in the dining hall with me;

114. 114

     नna मयाma·yā सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ एकच्छन्नेe·kac·chan·ne वसिस्सन्ति,va·sis·san·ti विनाvi·nā मयाma·yā एकच्छन्नेe·kac·chan·ne वसिस्सन्ति।va·sis·san·ti

     Na mayā saddhiṁ ekacchanne vasissanti, vinā mayā ekacchanne vasissanti.

     they won’t stay in the same room with me;

115. 115

     नna मयाma·yā सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ यथावुड्ढंya·thā·vuḍ·ḍhaṃ अभिवादनंa·bhi·vā·da·naṃ पच्चुट्ठानंpac·cuṭ·ṭhā·naṃ अञ्जलिकम्मंañ·ja·li·kam·maṃ सामीचिकम्मंsā·mī·ci·kam·maṃ करिस्सन्ति,ka·ris·san·ti विनाvi·nā मयाma·yā यथावुड्ढंya·thā·vuḍ·ḍhaṃ अभिवादनंa·bhi·vā·da·naṃ पच्चुट्ठानंpac·cuṭ·ṭhā·naṃ अञ्जलिकम्मंañ·ja·li·kam·maṃ सामीचिकम्मंsā·mī·ci·kam·maṃ करिस्सन्ति,ka·ris·san·ti भविस्सतिbha·vis·sa·ti सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa ततोनिदानंta·to·ni·dā·naṃ भण्डनंbhaṇ·ḍa·naṃ कलहोka·la·ho विग्गहोvig·ga·ho विवादोvi·vā·do सङ्घभेदोsaṅ·gha·bhe·do सङ्घराजिsaṅ·gha·rā·ji सङ्घववत्थानंsaṅ·gha·va·vat·thā·naṃ सङ्घनानाकरणन्’ति,saṅ·gha·nā·nā·ka·ra·ṇan भेदगरुकेन,bhe·da·ga·ru·ke·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā परेसम्पिpa·re·sam·pi सद्धायsad·dhā·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti देसेतब्बा”ति।de·se·tab·bā

     Na mayā saddhiṁ yathāvuḍḍhaṁ abhivādanaṁ paccuṭṭhānaṁ añjalikammaṁ sāmīcikammaṁ karissanti, vinā mayā yathāvuḍḍhaṁ abhivādanaṁ paccuṭṭhānaṁ añjalikammaṁ sāmīcikammaṁ karissanti, bhavissati saṅghassa tatonidānaṁ bhaṇḍanaṁ kalaho viggaho vivādo saṅghabhedo saṅgharāji saṅghavavatthānaṁ saṅghanānākaraṇan’ti, bhedagarukena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā paresampi saddhāya āpatti desetabbā”ti.

     we won’t bow down, stand up, raise our joined palms, or do acts of respect toward one another according to seniority. Because of this, there’ll be arguments and disputes in the Sangha; there’ll be schism, fracture, and separation in the Sangha,’ and if he understands the gravity of schism, he should confess the offense even out of confidence in the others.”

116. 116

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā उक्खित्तानुवत्तकानंuk·khit·tā·nu·vat·ta·kā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ भासित्वाbhā·sit·vā उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

     Atha kho bhagavā ukkhittānuvattakānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ etamatthaṁ bhāsitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi.

     The Buddha then got up from his seat and left.

117. 117

     Monks belonging to different Buddhist sects

118. 118

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na उक्खित्तानुवत्तकाuk·khit·tā·nu·vat·ta·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū तत्थेवtat·the·va अन्तोसीमायan·to·sī·mā·ya उपोसथंu·po·sa·thaṃ करोन्ति,ka·ron·ti सङ्घकम्मंsaṅ·gha·kam·maṃ करोन्ति।ka·ron·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena ukkhittānuvattakā bhikkhū tattheva antosīmāya uposathaṁ karonti, saṅghakammaṁ karonti.

     Soon those monks who sided with the ejected monk did the observance-day ceremony and legal procedures right there within the monastery zone.

119. 119

     उक्खेपकाuk·khe·pa·kā पनpa·na भिक्खूbhik·khū निस्सीमंnis·sī·maṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā उपोसथंu·po·sa·thaṃ करोन्ति,ka·ron·ti सङ्घकम्मंsaṅ·gha·kam·maṃ करोन्ति।ka·ron·ti

     Ukkhepakā pana bhikkhū nissīmaṁ gantvā uposathaṁ karonti, saṅghakammaṁ karonti.

     But the monks who had ejected him went outside the monastery zone and did the observance-day ceremony and legal procedures there.

120. 120

     अथa·tha खोkho अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro उक्खेपकोuk·khe·pa·ko भिक्खुbhik·khu येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

     Atha kho aññataro ukkhepako bhikkhu yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

     One of the monks who had done the ejection went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down,

121. 121

     एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नोni·sin·no खोkho सोso भिक्खुbhik·khu भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho so bhikkhu bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     and told him what was happening.

122. 122

     “ते,te भन्ते,bhan·te उक्खित्तानुवत्तकाuk·khit·tā·nu·vat·ta·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū तत्थेवtat·the·va अन्तोसीमायan·to·sī·mā·ya उपोसथंu·po·sa·thaṃ करोन्ति,ka·ron·ti सङ्घकम्मंsaṅ·gha·kam·maṃ करोन्ति।ka·ron·ti

     “Te, bhante, ukkhittānuvattakā bhikkhū tattheva antosīmāya uposathaṁ karonti, saṅghakammaṁ karonti.

     (Pāli only)

123. 123

     मयंma·yaṃ पनpa·na उक्खेपकाuk·khe·pa·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū निस्सीमंnis·sī·maṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā उपोसथंu·po·sa·thaṃ करोम,ka·ro·ma सङ्घकम्मंsaṅ·gha·kam·maṃ करोमा”ति।ka·ro·mā

     Mayaṁ pana ukkhepakā bhikkhū nissīmaṁ gantvā uposathaṁ karoma, saṅghakammaṁ karomā”ti.

     (Pāli only)

124. 124

     “तेte चे,ce भिक्खु,bhik·khu उक्खित्तानुवत्तकाuk·khit·tā·nu·vat·ta·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū तत्थेवtat·the·va अन्तोसीमायan·to·sī·mā·ya उपोसथंu·po·sa·thaṃ करिस्सन्ति,ka·ris·san·ti सङ्घकम्मंsaṅ·gha·kam·maṃ करिस्सन्ति,ka·ris·san·ti यथाya·thā मयाma·yā ञत्तिñat·ti चca अनुस्सावनाa·nus·sā·va·nā चca पञ्ञत्ता,pañ·ñat·tā तेसंte·saṃ तानिtā·ni कम्मानिkam·mā·ni धम्मिकानिdham·mi·kā·ni कम्मानिkam·mā·ni भविस्सन्तिbha·vis·san·ti अकुप्पानिa·kup·pā·ni ठानारहानि।ṭhā·nā·ra·hā·ni

     “Te ce, bhikkhu, ukkhittānuvattakā bhikkhū tattheva antosīmāya uposathaṁ karissanti, saṅghakammaṁ karissanti, yathā mayā ñatti ca anussāvanā ca paññattā, tesaṁ tāni kammāni dhammikāni kammāni bhavissanti akuppāni ṭhānārahāni.

     The Buddha replied: “If those monks who side with the ejected monk do the observance-day ceremony and legal procedures right there within the monastery zone, and it’s in accordance with the motion and announcements as I’ve laid them down, then those procedures are legitimate, irreversible, and fit to stand.

125. 125

     तुम्हेtum·he चे,ce भिक्खु,bhik·khu उक्खेपकाuk·khe·pa·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū तत्थेवtat·the·va अन्तोसीमायan·to·sī·mā·ya उपोसथंu·po·sa·thaṃ करिस्सथ,ka·ris·sa·tha सङ्घकम्मंsaṅ·gha·kam·maṃ करिस्सथ,ka·ris·sa·tha यथाya·thā मयाma·yā ञत्तिñat·ti चca अनुस्सावनाa·nus·sā·va·nā चca पञ्ञत्ता,pañ·ñat·tā तुम्हाकम्पिtum·hā·kam·pi तानिtā·ni कम्मानिkam·mā·ni धम्मिकानिdham·mi·kā·ni कम्मानिkam·mā·ni भविस्सन्तिbha·vis·san·ti अकुप्पानिa·kup·pā·ni ठानारहानि।ṭhā·nā·ra·hā·ni

     Tumhe ce, bhikkhu, ukkhepakā bhikkhū tattheva antosīmāya uposathaṁ karissatha, saṅghakammaṁ karissatha, yathā mayā ñatti ca anussāvanā ca paññattā, tumhākampi tāni kammāni dhammikāni kammāni bhavissanti akuppāni ṭhānārahāni.

     And if you, the monks who did the ejection, do the observance-day ceremony and legal procedures right there within the monastery zone, and it’s in accordance with the motion and announcements as I’ve laid them down, then those procedures too are legitimate, irreversible, and fit to stand.

126. 126

     तंtaṃ किस्सkis·sa हेतु?he·tu

     Taṁ kissa hetu?

     (Pāli only)

127. 127

     नानासंवासकाnā·nā·saṃ·vā·sa·kā एतेe·te भिक्खूbhik·khū तुम्हेहि,tum·he·hi तुम्हेtum·he चca तेहिte·hi नानासंवासका।nā·nā·saṃ·vā·sa·kā

     Nānāsaṁvāsakā ete bhikkhū tumhehi, tumhe ca tehi nānāsaṁvāsakā.

     This is so because you now belong to a different Buddhist sect.

128. 128

     द्वेमा,dve·mā भिक्खु,bhik·khu नानासंवासकभूमियो—nā·nā·saṃ·vā·sa·ka·bhū·mi·yo

     Dvemā, bhikkhu, nānāsaṁvāsakabhūmiyo—

     There are these two grounds for belonging to a different Buddhist sect.

129. 129

     अत्तनाat·ta·nā वाvā अत्तानंat·tā·naṃ नानासंवासकंnā·nā·saṃ·vā·sa·kaṃ करोति,ka·ro·ti समग्गोsa·mag·go वाvā नंnaṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho उक्खिपतिuk·khi·pa·ti अदस्सनेa·das·sa·ne वाvā अप्पटिकम्मेap·pa·ṭi·kam·me वाvā अप्पटिनिस्सग्गेap·pa·ṭi·nis·sag·ge वा।vā

     attanā vā attānaṁ nānāsaṁvāsakaṁ karoti, samaggo vā naṁ saṅgho ukkhipati adassane vā appaṭikamme vā appaṭinissagge vā.

     Either one makes oneself belong to a different Buddhist sect, or a unanimous assembly ejects one for not recognizing an offense, for not making amends for an offense, or for not giving up a bad view.

130. 130

     इमाi·mā खो,kho भिक्खु,bhik·khu द्वेdve नानासंवासकभूमियो।nā·nā·saṃ·vā·sa·ka·bhū·mi·yo

     Imā kho, bhikkhu, dve nānāsaṁvāsakabhūmiyo.

     (Pāli only)

131. 131

     द्वेमा,dve·mā भिक्खु,bhik·khu समानसंवासकभूमियो—sa·mā·na·saṃ·vā·sa·ka·bhū·mi·yo

     Dvemā, bhikkhu, samānasaṁvāsakabhūmiyo—

     And there are these two grounds for belonging to the same Buddhist sect.

132. 132

     अत्तनाat·ta·nā वाvā अत्तानंat·tā·naṃ समानसंवासंsa·mā·na·saṃ·vā·saṃ करोति,ka·ro·ti समग्गोsa·mag·go वाvā नंnaṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho उक्खित्तंuk·khit·taṃ ओसारेतिo·sā·re·ti अदस्सनेa·das·sa·ne वाvā अप्पटिकम्मेap·pa·ṭi·kam·me वाvā अप्पटिनिस्सग्गेap·pa·ṭi·nis·sag·ge वा।vā

     attanā vā attānaṁ samānasaṁvāsaṁ karoti, samaggo vā naṁ saṅgho ukkhittaṁ osāreti adassane vā appaṭikamme vā appaṭinissagge vā.

     Either one makes oneself belong to the same Buddhist sect, or a unanimous assembly readmits one who had been ejected for not recognizing an offense, for not making amends for an offense, or for not giving up a bad view.”

133. 133

     इमाi·mā खो,kho भिक्खु,bhik·khu द्वेdve समानसंवासकभूमियो”ति।sa·mā·na·saṃ·vā·sa·ka·bhū·mi·yo

     Imā kho, bhikkhu, dve samānasaṁvāsakabhūmiyo”ti.

     (Pāli only)

134. 134

     Proper conduct when the Sangha is divided

135. 135

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na भिक्खूbhik·khū भत्तग्गेbhat·tag·ge अन्तरघरेan·ta·ra·gha·re भण्डनजाताbhaṇ·ḍa·na·jā·tā कलहजाताka·la·ha·jā·tā विवादापन्नाvi·vā·dā·pan·nā अञ्ञमञ्ञंañ·ña·mañ·ñaṃ अननुलोमिकंa·na·nu·lo·mi·kaṃ कायकम्मंkā·ya·kam·maṃ वचीकम्मंva·cī·kam·maṃ उपदंसेन्ति,u·pa·daṃ·sen·ti हत्थपरामासंhat·tha·pa·rā·mā·saṃ करोन्ति।ka·ron·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena bhikkhū bhattagge antaraghare bhaṇḍanajātā kalahajātā vivādāpannā aññamaññaṁ ananulomikaṁ kāyakammaṁ vacīkammaṁ upadaṁsenti, hatthaparāmāsaṁ karonti.

     At this time the monks were arguing and disputing in the dining halls in inhabited areas, behaving improperly by body and speech, such as grabbing one another.

136. 136

     मनुस्साma·nus·sā उज्झायन्तिuj·jhā·yan·ti खिय्यन्तिkhiy·yan·ti विपाचेन्ति—vi·pā·cen·ti

     Manussā ujjhāyanti khiyyanti vipācenti—

     People complained and criticized them,

137. 137

     “कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma समणाsa·ma·ṇā सक्यपुत्तियाsak·ya·put·ti·yā भत्तग्गेbhat·tag·ge अन्तरघरेan·ta·ra·gha·re भण्डनजाताbhaṇ·ḍa·na·jā·tā कलहजाताka·la·ha·jā·tā विवादापन्नाvi·vā·dā·pan·nā अञ्ञमञ्ञंañ·ña·mañ·ñaṃ अननुलोमिकंa·na·nu·lo·mi·kaṃ कायकम्मंkā·ya·kam·maṃ वचीकम्मंva·cī·kam·maṃ उपदंसेस्सन्ति,u·pa·daṃ·ses·san·ti हत्थपरामासंhat·tha·pa·rā·mā·saṃ करिस्सन्ती”ति।ka·ris·san·tī

     “kathañhi nāma samaṇā sakyaputtiyā bhattagge antaraghare bhaṇḍanajātā kalahajātā vivādāpannā aññamaññaṁ ananulomikaṁ kāyakammaṁ vacīkammaṁ upadaṁsessanti, hatthaparāmāsaṁ karissantī”ti.

     “How can the Sakyan monastics behave like this?”

138. 138

     अस्सोसुंas·so·suṃ खोkho भिक्खूbhik·khū तेसंte·saṃ मनुस्सानंma·nus·sā·naṃ उज्झायन्तानंuj·jhā·yan·tā·naṃ खिय्यन्तानंkhiy·yan·tā·naṃ विपाचेन्तानं।vi·pā·cen·tā·naṃ

     Assosuṁ kho bhikkhū tesaṁ manussānaṁ ujjhāyantānaṁ khiyyantānaṁ vipācentānaṁ.

     The monks heard the complaints of those people,

139. 139

     येye तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū अप्पिच्छाap·pic·chā तेte उज्झायन्तिuj·jhā·yan·ti खिय्यन्तिkhiy·yan·ti विपाचेन्ति—vi·pā·cen·ti

     Ye te bhikkhū appicchā te ujjhāyanti khiyyanti vipācenti—

     and the monks of few desires complained and criticized them,

140. 140

     “कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma भिक्खूbhik·khū भत्तग्गेbhat·tag·ge अन्तरघरेan·ta·ra·gha·re भण्डनजाताbhaṇ·ḍa·na·jā·tā कलहजाताka·la·ha·jā·tā विवादापन्नाvi·vā·dā·pan·nā अञ्ञमञ्ञंañ·ña·mañ·ñaṃ अननुलोमिकंa·na·nu·lo·mi·kaṃ कायकम्मंkā·ya·kam·maṃ वचीकम्मंva·cī·kam·maṃ उपदंसेस्सन्ति,u·pa·daṃ·ses·san·ti हत्थपरामासंhat·tha·pa·rā·mā·saṃ करिस्सन्ती”ति।ka·ris·san·tī

     “kathañhi nāma bhikkhū bhattagge antaraghare bhaṇḍanajātā kalahajātā vivādāpannā aññamaññaṁ ananulomikaṁ kāyakammaṁ vacīkammaṁ upadaṁsessanti, hatthaparāmāsaṁ karissantī”ti.

     “How can monks behave like this?”

141. 141

     अथa·tha खोkho तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुंā·ro·ce·suṃ …पे…pe

     Atha kho te bhikkhū bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ …pe…

     They told the Buddha. …

142. 142

     “सच्चंsac·caṃ किर,ki·ra भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूbhik·khū भत्तग्गेbhat·tag·ge अन्तरघरेan·ta·ra·gha·re भण्डनजाताbhaṇ·ḍa·na·jā·tā …पे…pe हत्थपरामासंhat·tha·pa·rā·mā·saṃ करोन्ती”ति?ka·ron·tī

     “saccaṁ kira, bhikkhave, bhikkhū bhattagge antaraghare bhaṇḍanajātā …pe… hatthaparāmāsaṁ karontī”ti?

     “Is it true, monks, that monks are behaving like this?”

143. 143

     “सच्चं,sac·caṃ भगवा”ति।bha·ga·vā

     “Saccaṁ, bhagavā”ti.

     “It’s true, sir.”

144. 144

     विगरहिvi·ga·ra·hi बुद्धोbud·dho भगवाbha·ga·vā …पे…pe

     Vigarahi buddho bhagavā …pe…

     The Buddha rebuked them …

145. 145

     विगरहित्वाvi·ga·ra·hit·vā धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

     vigarahitvā dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

     He then gave a teaching and addressed the monks:

146. 146

     “भिन्ने,bhin·ne भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe अधम्मियायमानेa·dham·mi·yā·ya·mā·ne असम्मोदिकायa·sam·mo·di·kā·ya वत्तमानायvat·ta·mā·nā·ya ‘एत्तावताet·tā·va·tā नna अञ्ञमञ्ञंañ·ña·mañ·ñaṃ अननुलोमिकंa·na·nu·lo·mi·kaṃ कायकम्मंkā·ya·kam·maṃ वचीकम्मंva·cī·kam·maṃ उपदंसेस्साम,u·pa·daṃ·ses·sā·ma हत्थपरामासंhat·tha·pa·rā·mā·saṃ करिस्सामा’ति—ka·ris·sā·mā

     “bhinne, bhikkhave, saṅghe adhammiyāyamāne asammodikāya vattamānāya ‘ettāvatā na aññamaññaṁ ananulomikaṁ kāyakammaṁ vacīkammaṁ upadaṁsessāma, hatthaparāmāsaṁ karissāmā’ti—

     “When the Sangha is divided and the monks are behaving contrary to the Teaching and are not on friendly terms,

147. 147

     आसनेā·sa·ne निसीदितब्बं।ni·sī·di·tab·baṃ

     āsane nisīditabbaṁ.

     they should sit down and reflect, ‘We won’t behave improperly by body or speech, such as grabbing one another.’

148. 148

     भिन्ने,bhin·ne भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe धम्मियायमानेdham·mi·yā·ya·mā·ne सम्मोदिकायsam·mo·di·kā·ya वत्तमानायvat·ta·mā·nā·ya आसनन्तरिकायā·sa·nan·ta·ri·kā·ya निसीदितब्बन्”ति।ni·sī·di·tab·ban

     Bhinne, bhikkhave, saṅghe dhammiyāyamāne sammodikāya vattamānāya āsanantarikāya nisīditabban”ti.

     When the Sangha is divided, but the monks are behaving in accordance with the Teaching and are on friendly terms, they should sit down one seat apart.”

149. 149

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na भिक्खूbhik·khū सङ्घमज्झेsaṅ·gha·maj·jhe भण्डनजाताbhaṇ·ḍa·na·jā·tā कलहजाताka·la·ha·jā·tā विवादापन्नाvi·vā·dā·pan·nā अञ्ञमञ्ञंañ·ña·mañ·ñaṃ मुखसत्तीहिmu·kha·sat·tī·hi वितुदन्ताvi·tu·dan·tā विहरन्ति।vi·ha·ran·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena bhikkhū saṅghamajjhe bhaṇḍanajātā kalahajātā vivādāpannā aññamaññaṁ mukhasattīhi vitudantā viharanti.

     The monks were also arguing and disputing in the midst of the Sangha, attacking one another verbally,

150. 150

     तेte नna सक्कोन्तिsak·kon·ti तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसमेतुं।vū·pa·sa·me·tuṃ

     Te na sakkonti taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasametuṁ.

     and were unable to resolve that legal issue.

151. 151

     अथa·tha खोkho अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ अट्ठासि।aṭ·ṭhā·si एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ ठितोṭhi·to खोkho सोso भिक्खुbhik·khu भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho aññataro bhikkhu yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho so bhikkhu bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     A certain monk went to the Buddha, bowed, and told him what was happening, adding,

152. 152

     “इध,i·dha भन्ते,bhan·te भिक्खूbhik·khū सङ्घमज्झेsaṅ·gha·maj·jhe भण्डनजाताbhaṇ·ḍa·na·jā·tā कलहजाताka·la·ha·jā·tā विवादापन्नाvi·vā·dā·pan·nā अञ्ञमञ्ञंañ·ña·mañ·ñaṃ मुखसत्तीहिmu·kha·sat·tī·hi वितुदन्ताvi·tu·dan·tā विहरन्ति।vi·ha·ran·ti

     “idha, bhante, bhikkhū saṅghamajjhe bhaṇḍanajātā kalahajātā vivādāpannā aññamaññaṁ mukhasattīhi vitudantā viharanti.

     (Pāli only)

153. 153

     तेte नna सक्कोन्तिsak·kon·ti तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसमेतुं।vū·pa·sa·me·tuṃ

     Te na sakkonti taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasametuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

154. 154

     साधु,sā·dhu भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā येनye·na तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū तेनुपसङ्कमतुte·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·ma·tu अनुकम्पंa·nu·kam·paṃ उपादाया”ति।u·pā·dā·yā

     Sādhu, bhante, bhagavā yena te bhikkhū tenupasaṅkamatu anukampaṁ upādāyā”ti.

     “Sir, please go to those monks out of compassion.”

155. 155

     अधिवासेसिa·dhi·vā·se·si भगवाbha·ga·vā तुण्हीभावेन।tuṇ·hī·bhā·ve·na

     Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.

     The Buddha consented by remaining silent.

156. 156

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā येनye·na तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā पञ्ञत्तेpañ·ñat·te आसनेā·sa·ne निसीदि,ni·sī·di निसज्जni·saj·ja खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho bhagavā yena te bhikkhū tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi, nisajja kho bhagavā te bhikkhū etadavoca—

     He then went to those monks, sat down on the prepared seat, and said,

157. 157

     “अलं,a·laṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve माmā भण्डनंbhaṇ·ḍa·naṃ माmā कलहंka·la·haṃ माmā विग्गहंvig·ga·haṃ माmā विवादन्”ति।vi·vā·dan

     “alaṁ, bhikkhave, mā bhaṇḍanaṁ mā kalahaṁ mā viggahaṁ mā vivādan”ti.

     “Enough, monks, don’t quarrel and dispute.”

158. 158

     एवंe·vaṃ वुत्ते,vut·te अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro अधम्मवादीa·dham·ma·vā·dī भिक्खुbhik·khu भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Evaṁ vutte, aññataro adhammavādī bhikkhu bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     A certain monk who spoke contrary to the Teaching replied,

159. 159

     “आगमेतु,ā·ga·me·tu भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā धम्मस्सामी;dham·mas·sā·mī

     “āgametu, bhante, bhagavā dhammassāmī;

     “Wait, sir,

160. 160

     अप्पोस्सुक्को,ap·pos·suk·ko भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā दिट्ठधम्मसुखविहारमनुयुत्तोdiṭ·ṭha·dham·ma·su·kha·vi·hā·ra·ma·nu·yut·to विहरतु।vi·ha·ra·tu

     appossukko, bhante, bhagavā diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāramanuyutto viharatu.

     you’re the Lord of the Teaching. Be at ease and enjoy the happiness of meditation.

161. 161

     मयमेतेनma·ya·me·te·na भण्डनेनbhaṇ·ḍa·ne·na कलहेनka·la·he·na विग्गहेनvig·ga·he·na विवादेनvi·vā·de·na पञ्ञायिस्सामा”ति।pañ·ñā·yis·sā·mā

     Mayametena bhaṇḍanena kalahena viggahena vivādena paññāyissāmā”ti.

     We’ll face the consequences of this quarreling and disputing.”

162. 162

     दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Dutiyampi kho bhagavā te bhikkhū etadavoca—

     The Buddha repeated his appeal to those monks,

163. 163

     “अलं,a·laṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve माmā भण्डनंbhaṇ·ḍa·naṃ माmā कलहंka·la·haṃ माmā विग्गहंvig·ga·haṃ माmā विवादन्”ति।vi·vā·dan

     “alaṁ, bhikkhave, mā bhaṇḍanaṁ mā kalahaṁ mā viggahaṁ mā vivādan”ti.

     (Pāli only)

164. 164

     दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi खोkho सोso अधम्मवादीa·dham·ma·vā·dī भिक्खुbhik·khu भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Dutiyampi kho so adhammavādī bhikkhu bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     but got the same reply.

165. 165

     “आगमेतु,ā·ga·me·tu भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā धम्मस्सामी;dham·mas·sā·mī

     “āgametu, bhante, bhagavā dhammassāmī;

     (Pāli only)

166. 166

     अप्पोस्सुक्को,ap·pos·suk·ko भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā दिट्ठधम्मसुखविहारमनुयुत्तोdiṭ·ṭha·dham·ma·su·kha·vi·hā·ra·ma·nu·yut·to विहरतु।vi·ha·ra·tu

     appossukko, bhante, bhagavā diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāramanuyutto viharatu.

     (Pāli only)

167. 167

     मयमेतेनma·ya·me·te·na भण्डनेनbhaṇ·ḍa·ne·na कलहेनka·la·he·na विग्गहेनvig·ga·he·na विवादेनvi·vā·de·na पञ्ञायिस्सामा”ति।pañ·ñā·yis·sā·mā

     Mayametena bhaṇḍanena kalahena viggahena vivādena paññāyissāmā”ti.

     (Pāli only)

168. 168

     2। दीघावुवत्थुdī·ghā·vu·vat·thu

     2. Dīghāvuvatthu

     2. The account of Dīghāvu

169. 169

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

     Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi—

     The Buddha then said:

170. 170

     “भूतपुब्बं,bhū·ta·pub·baṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve बाराणसियंbā·rā·ṇa·si·yaṃ ब्रह्मदत्तोbrah·ma·dat·to नामnā·ma कासिराजाkā·si·rā·jā अहोसिa·ho·si अड्ढोaḍ·ḍho महद्धनोma·had·dha·no महाभोगोma·hā·bho·go महब्बलोma·hab·ba·lo महावाहनोma·hā·vā·ha·no महाविजितोma·hā·vi·ji·to परिपुण्णकोसकोट्ठागारो।pa·ri·puṇ·ṇa·ko·sa·koṭ·ṭhā·gā·ro

     “bhūtapubbaṁ, bhikkhave, bārāṇasiyaṁ brahmadatto nāma kāsirājā ahosi aḍḍho mahaddhano mahābhogo mahabbalo mahāvāhano mahāvijito paripuṇṇakosakoṭṭhāgāro.

     “At one time in Benares, monks, there was a king of Kāsi called Brahmadatta. He was rich and powerful, had many vehicles and transport animals, and possessed a large kingdom and much wealth.

171. 171

     दीघीतिdī·ghī·ti नामnā·ma कोसलराजाko·sa·la·rā·jā अहोसिa·ho·si दलिद्दोda·lid·do अप्पधनोap·pa·dha·no अप्पभोगोap·pa·bho·go अप्पबलोap·pa·ba·lo अप्पवाहनोap·pa·vā·ha·no अप्पविजितोap·pa·vi·ji·to अपरिपुण्णकोसकोट्ठागारो।a·pa·ri·puṇ·ṇa·ko·sa·koṭ·ṭhā·gā·ro

     Dīghīti nāma kosalarājā ahosi daliddo appadhano appabhogo appabalo appavāhano appavijito aparipuṇṇakosakoṭṭhāgāro.

     Then there was Dīghīti, the king of Kosala, who was poor and had little power, who had few vehicles and transport animals, and who possessed only a small kingdom and little wealth.

172. 172

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve ब्रह्मदत्तोbrah·ma·dat·to कासिराजाkā·si·rā·jā चतुरङ्गिनिंca·tu·raṅ·gi·niṃ सेनंse·naṃ सन्नय्हित्वाsan·nay·hit·vā दीघीतिंdī·ghī·tiṃ कोसलराजानंko·sa·la·rā·jā·naṃ अब्भुय्यासि।ab·bhuy·yā·si

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, brahmadatto kāsirājā caturaṅginiṁ senaṁ sannayhitvā dīghītiṁ kosalarājānaṁ abbhuyyāsi.

     At one time King Brahmadatta, armed with his fourfold army, marched out to attack King Dīghīti.

173. 173

     अस्सोसिas·so·si खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दीघीतिdī·ghī·ti कोसलराजा—‘ब्रह्मदत्तोko·sa·la·rā·jā किरki·ra कासिराजाkā·si·rā·jā चतुरङ्गिनिंca·tu·raṅ·gi·niṃ सेनंse·naṃ सन्नय्हित्वाsan·nay·hit·vā ममंma·maṃ अब्भुय्यातो’ति।ab·bhuy·yā·to

     Assosi kho, bhikkhave, dīghīti kosalarājā—‘brahmadatto kira kāsirājā caturaṅginiṁ senaṁ sannayhitvā mamaṁ abbhuyyāto’ti.

     When King Dīghīti heard about this,

174. 174

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दीघीतिस्सdī·ghī·tis·sa कोसलरञ्ञोko·sa·la·rañ·ño एतदहोसि—‘ब्रह्मदत्तोe·ta·da·ho·si खोkho कासिराजाkā·si·rā·jā अड्ढोaḍ·ḍho महद्धनोma·had·dha·no महाभोगोma·hā·bho·go महब्बलोma·hab·ba·lo महावाहनोma·hā·vā·ha·no महाविजितोma·hā·vi·ji·to परिपुण्णकोसकोट्ठागारो,pa·ri·puṇ·ṇa·ko·sa·koṭ·ṭhā·gā·ro अहंa·haṃ पनम्हिpa·nam·hi दलिद्दोda·lid·do अप्पधनोap·pa·dha·no अप्पभोगोap·pa·bho·go अप्पबलोap·pa·ba·lo अप्पवाहनोap·pa·vā·ha·no अप्पविजितोap·pa·vi·ji·to अपरिपुण्णकोसकोट्ठागारो,a·pa·ri·puṇ·ṇa·ko·sa·koṭ·ṭhā·gā·ro नाहंnā·haṃ पटिबलोpa·ṭi·ba·lo ब्रह्मदत्तेनbrah·ma·dat·te·na कासिरञ्ञाkā·si·rañ·ñā एकसङ्घातम्पिe·ka·saṅ·ghā·tam·pi सहितुं।sa·hi·tuṃ

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, dīghītissa kosalarañño etadahosi—‘brahmadatto kho kāsirājā aḍḍho mahaddhano mahābhogo mahabbalo mahāvāhano mahāvijito paripuṇṇakosakoṭṭhāgāro, ahaṁ panamhi daliddo appadhano appabhogo appabalo appavāhano appavijito aparipuṇṇakosakoṭṭhāgāro, nāhaṁ paṭibalo brahmadattena kāsiraññā ekasaṅghātampi sahituṁ.

     he reflected on King Brahmadatta’s superior wealth and power, and he concluded, ‘I’m incapable of repelling even a single strike from Brahmadatta.

175. 175

     यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ पटिकच्चेवpa·ṭi·kac·ce·va नगरम्हाna·ga·ram·hā निप्पतेय्यन्’ति।nip·pa·tey·yan

     Yannūnāhaṁ paṭikacceva nagaramhā nippateyyan’ti.

     Let me flee the town before he arrives.’

176. 176

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दीघीतिdī·ghī·ti कोसलराजाko·sa·la·rā·jā महेसिंma·he·siṃ आदायā·dā·ya पटिकच्चेवpa·ṭi·kac·ce·va नगरम्हाna·ga·ram·hā निप्पति।nip·pa·ti

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, dīghīti kosalarājā mahesiṁ ādāya paṭikacceva nagaramhā nippati.

     And he fled the town together with his queen.

177. 177

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve ब्रह्मदत्तोbrah·ma·dat·to कासिराजाkā·si·rā·jā दीघीतिस्सdī·ghī·tis·sa कोसलरञ्ञोko·sa·la·rañ·ño बलञ्चba·lañ·ca वाहनञ्चvā·ha·nañ·ca जनपदञ्चja·na·pa·dañ·ca कोसञ्चko·sañ·ca कोट्ठागारञ्चkoṭ·ṭhā·gā·rañ·ca अभिविजियa·bhi·vi·ji·ya अज्झावसति।aj·jhā·va·sa·ti

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, brahmadatto kāsirājā dīghītissa kosalarañño balañca vāhanañca janapadañca kosañca koṭṭhāgārañca abhivijiya ajjhāvasati.

     King Brahmadatta then conquered and seized King Dīghīti’s army, vehicles, and transport animals, as well as his country and wealth.

178. 178

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दीघीतिdī·ghī·ti कोसलराजाko·sa·la·rā·jā सपजापतिकोsa·pa·jā·pa·ti·ko येनye·na बाराणसीbā·rā·ṇa·sī तेनte·na पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, dīghīti kosalarājā sapajāpatiko yena bārāṇasī tena pakkāmi.

     King Dīghīti and his wife set out for Benares.

179. 179

     अनुपुब्बेनa·nu·pub·be·na येनye·na बाराणसीbā·rā·ṇa·sī तदवसरि।ta·da·va·sa·ri तत्रtat·ra सुदं,su·daṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दीघीतिdī·ghī·ti कोसलराजाko·sa·la·rā·jā सपजापतिकोsa·pa·jā·pa·ti·ko बाराणसियंbā·rā·ṇa·si·yaṃ अञ्ञतरस्मिंañ·ña·ta·ras·miṃ पच्चन्तिमेpac·can·ti·me ओकासेo·kā·se कुम्भकारनिवेसनेkum·bha·kā·ra·ni·ve·sa·ne अञ्ञातकवेसेनañ·ñā·ta·ka·ve·se·na परिब्बाजकच्छन्नेनpa·rib·bā·ja·kac·chan·ne·na पटिवसति।pa·ṭi·va·sa·ti

     Anupubbena yena bārāṇasī tadavasari. Tatra sudaṁ, bhikkhave, dīghīti kosalarājā sapajāpatiko bārāṇasiyaṁ aññatarasmiṁ paccantime okāse kumbhakāranivesane aññātakavesena paribbājakacchannena paṭivasati.

     When they eventually arrived, they stayed in the house of a potter on the edge of the town, disguised as wanderers.

180. 180

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दीघीतिस्सdī·ghī·tis·sa कोसलरञ्ञोko·sa·la·rañ·ño महेसीma·he·sī नचिरस्सेवna·ci·ras·se·va गब्भिनीgab·bhi·nī अहोसि।a·ho·si

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, dīghītissa kosalarañño mahesī nacirasseva gabbhinī ahosi.

     Soon the queen became pregnant.

181. 181

     तस्साtas·sā एवरूपोe·va·rū·po दोहळोdo·ha·ḷo उप्पन्नोup·pan·no होति—इच्छतिho·ti सूरियस्सsū·ri·yas·sa उग्गमनकालेug·ga·ma·na·kā·le चतुरङ्गिनिंca·tu·raṅ·gi·niṃ सेनंse·naṃ सन्नद्धंsan·nad·dhaṃ वम्मिकंvam·mi·kaṃ सुभूमेsu·bhū·me ठितंṭhi·taṃ पस्सितुं,pas·si·tuṃ खग्गानञ्चkhag·gā·nañ·ca धोवनंdho·va·naṃ पातुं।pā·tuṃ

     Tassā evarūpo dohaḷo uppanno hoti—icchati sūriyassa uggamanakāle caturaṅginiṁ senaṁ sannaddhaṁ vammikaṁ subhūme ṭhitaṁ passituṁ, khaggānañca dhovanaṁ pātuṁ.

     She craved to see the fully equipped fourfold army arrayed on even ground at sunrise and to drink water from the washing of swords.

182. 182

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दीघीतिस्सdī·ghī·tis·sa कोसलरञ्ञोko·sa·la·rañ·ño महेसीma·he·sī दीघीतिंdī·ghī·tiṃ कोसलराजानंko·sa·la·rā·jā·naṃ एतदवोच—‘गब्भिनीम्हि,e·ta·da·vo·ca देव।de·va तस्साtas·sā मेme एवरूपोe·va·rū·po दोहळोdo·ha·ḷo उप्पन्नो—इच्छामिup·pan·no सूरियस्सsū·ri·yas·sa उग्गमनकालेug·ga·ma·na·kā·le चतुरङ्गिनिंca·tu·raṅ·gi·niṃ सेनंse·naṃ सन्नद्धंsan·nad·dhaṃ वम्मिकंvam·mi·kaṃ सुभूमेsu·bhū·me ठितंṭhi·taṃ पस्सितुं,pas·si·tuṃ खग्गानञ्चkhag·gā·nañ·ca धोवनंdho·va·naṃ पातुन्’ति।pā·tun

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, dīghītissa kosalarañño mahesī dīghītiṁ kosalarājānaṁ etadavoca—‘gabbhinīmhi, deva. Tassā me evarūpo dohaḷo uppanno—icchāmi sūriyassa uggamanakāle caturaṅginiṁ senaṁ sannaddhaṁ vammikaṁ subhūme ṭhitaṁ passituṁ, khaggānañca dhovanaṁ pātun’ti.

     She told the king.

183. 183

     ‘कुतो,ku·to देवि,de·vi अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ दुग्गतानंdug·ga·tā·naṃ चतुरङ्गिनीca·tu·raṅ·gi·nī सेनाse·nā सन्नद्धाsan·nad·dhā वम्मिकाvam·mi·kā सुभूमेsu·bhū·me ठिता,ṭhi·tā खग्गानञ्चkhag·gā·nañ·ca धोवनंdho·va·naṃ पातुन्’तिpā·tun

     ‘Kuto, devi, amhākaṁ duggatānaṁ caturaṅginī senā sannaddhā vammikā subhūme ṭhitā, khaggānañca dhovanaṁ pātun’ti

     He said, ‘How can we possibly achieve this when things are so difficult for us?’

184. 184

     ‘सचाहं,sa·cā·haṃ देव,de·va नna लभिस्सामि,la·bhis·sā·mi मरिस्सामी’ति।ma·ris·sā·mī

     ‘sacāhaṁ, deva, na labhissāmi, marissāmī’ti.

     She replied, ‘Well, if I don’t get it, I’ll die.’

185. 185

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेन,sa·ma·ye·na ब्रह्मदत्तस्सbrah·ma·dat·tas·sa कासिरञ्ञोkā·si·rañ·ño पुरोहितोpu·ro·hi·to ब्राह्मणोbrāh·ma·ṇo दीघीतिस्सdī·ghī·tis·sa कोसलरञ्ञोko·sa·la·rañ·ño सहायोsa·hā·yo होति।ho·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena, brahmadattassa kāsirañño purohito brāhmaṇo dīghītissa kosalarañño sahāyo hoti.

     At that time King Brahmadatta had a brahmin counselor who was a friend of King Dīghīti.

186. 186

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दीघीतिdī·ghī·ti कोसलराजाko·sa·la·rā·jā येनye·na ब्रह्मदत्तस्सbrah·ma·dat·tas·sa कासिरञ्ञोkā·si·rañ·ño पुरोहितोpu·ro·hi·to ब्राह्मणोbrāh·ma·ṇo तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā ब्रह्मदत्तस्सbrah·ma·dat·tas·sa कासिरञ्ञोkā·si·rañ·ño पुरोहितंpu·ro·hi·taṃ ब्राह्मणंbrāh·ma·ṇaṃ एतदवोच—‘सखीe·ta·da·vo·ca ते,te सम्म,sam·ma गब्भिनी।gab·bhi·nī

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, dīghīti kosalarājā yena brahmadattassa kāsirañño purohito brāhmaṇo tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā brahmadattassa kāsirañño purohitaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ etadavoca—‘sakhī te, samma, gabbhinī.

     King Dīghīti went to his friend and told him about his wife’s pregnancy

187. 187

     तस्साtas·sā एवरूपोe·va·rū·po दोहळोdo·ha·ḷo उप्पन्नो—इच्छतिup·pan·no सूरियस्सsū·ri·yas·sa उग्गमनकालेug·ga·ma·na·kā·le चतुरङ्गिनिंca·tu·raṅ·gi·niṃ सेनंse·naṃ सन्नद्धंsan·nad·dhaṃ वम्मिकंvam·mi·kaṃ सुभूमेsu·bhū·me ठितंṭhi·taṃ पस्सितुं,pas·si·tuṃ खग्गानञ्चkhag·gā·nañ·ca धोवनंdho·va·naṃ पातुन्’ति।pā·tun

     Tassā evarūpo dohaḷo uppanno—icchati sūriyassa uggamanakāle caturaṅginiṁ senaṁ sannaddhaṁ vammikaṁ subhūme ṭhitaṁ passituṁ, khaggānañca dhovanaṁ pātun’ti.

     and craving.

188. 188

     ‘तेनte·na हि,hi देव,de·va मयम्पिma·yam·pi देविंde·viṃ पस्सामा’ति।pas·sā·mā

     ‘Tena hi, deva, mayampi deviṁ passāmā’ti.

     The brahmin replied, ‘Well then, let me see the queen.’

189. 189

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दीघीतिस्सdī·ghī·tis·sa कोसलरञ्ञोko·sa·la·rañ·ño महेसीma·he·sī येनye·na ब्रह्मदत्तस्सbrah·ma·dat·tas·sa कासिरञ्ञोkā·si·rañ·ño पुरोहितोpu·ro·hi·to ब्राह्मणोbrāh·ma·ṇo तेनुपसङ्कमि।te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, dīghītissa kosalarañño mahesī yena brahmadattassa kāsirañño purohito brāhmaṇo tenupasaṅkami.

     The queen then went to that brahmin.

190. 190

     अद्दसाad·da·sā खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve ब्रह्मदत्तस्सbrah·ma·dat·tas·sa कासिरञ्ञोkā·si·rañ·ño पुरोहितोpu·ro·hi·to ब्राह्मणोbrāh·ma·ṇo दीघीतिस्सdī·ghī·tis·sa कोसलरञ्ञोko·sa·la·rañ·ño महेसिंma·he·siṃ दूरतोवdū·ra·to·va आगच्छन्तिं,ā·gac·chan·tiṃ दिस्वानdis·vā·na उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā एकंसंe·kaṃ·saṃ उत्तरासङ्गंut·ta·rā·saṅ·gaṃ करित्वाka·rit·vā येनye·na दीघीतिस्सdī·ghī·tis·sa कोसलरञ्ञोko·sa·la·rañ·ño महेसीma·he·sī तेनञ्जलिंte·nañ·ja·liṃ पणामेत्वाpa·ṇā·met·vā तिक्खत्तुंtik·khat·tuṃ उदानंu·dā·naṃ उदानेसि—u·dā·ne·si

     Addasā kho, bhikkhave, brahmadattassa kāsirañño purohito brāhmaṇo dīghītissa kosalarañño mahesiṁ dūratova āgacchantiṁ, disvāna uṭṭhāyāsanā ekaṁsaṁ uttarāsaṅgaṁ karitvā yena dīghītissa kosalarañño mahesī tenañjaliṁ paṇāmetvā tikkhattuṁ udānaṁ udānesi—

     When he saw her coming, he got up from his seat, arrange his upper robe over one shoulder, raise his joined palms, and uttered a heartfelt exclamation three times:

191. 191

     ‘कोसलराजाko·sa·la·rā·jā वतva·ta भोbho कुच्छिगतो,kuc·chi·ga·to कोसलराजाko·sa·la·rā·jā वतva·ta भोbho कुच्छिगतोति।kuc·chi·ga·to·ti

     ‘kosalarājā vata bho kucchigato, kosalarājā vata bho kucchigatoti.

     ‘You have the king of Kosala in your womb!’

192. 192

     अत्तमना,at·ta·ma·nā देवि,de·vi होहि।ho·hi

     Attamanā, devi, hohi.

     And he added, ‘Be pleased, lady.

193. 193

     लच्छसिlac·cha·si सूरियस्सsū·ri·yas·sa उग्गमनकालेug·ga·ma·na·kā·le चतुरङ्गिनिंca·tu·raṅ·gi·niṃ सेनंse·naṃ सन्नद्धंsan·nad·dhaṃ वम्मिकंvam·mi·kaṃ सुभूमेsu·bhū·me ठितंṭhi·taṃ पस्सितुं,pas·si·tuṃ खग्गानञ्चkhag·gā·nañ·ca धोवनंdho·va·naṃ पातुन्’ति।pā·tun

     Lacchasi sūriyassa uggamanakāle caturaṅginiṁ senaṁ sannaddhaṁ vammikaṁ subhūme ṭhitaṁ passituṁ, khaggānañca dhovanaṁ pātun’ti.

     You’ll get to see the fully equipped fourfold army arrayed on even ground at sunrise and to drink water from the washing of swords.’

194. 194

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve ब्रह्मदत्तस्सbrah·ma·dat·tas·sa कासिरञ्ञोkā·si·rañ·ño पुरोहितोpu·ro·hi·to ब्राह्मणोbrāh·ma·ṇo येनye·na ब्रह्मदत्तोbrah·ma·dat·to कासिराजाkā·si·rā·jā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā ब्रह्मदत्तंbrah·ma·dat·taṃ कासिराजानंkā·si·rā·jā·naṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, brahmadattassa kāsirañño purohito brāhmaṇo yena brahmadatto kāsirājā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā brahmadattaṁ kāsirājānaṁ etadavoca—

     The brahmin counselor then went to King Brahmadatta and said,

195. 195

     ‘तथा,ta·thā देव,de·va निमित्तानिni·mit·tā·ni दिस्सन्ति,dis·san·ti स्वेsve सूरियुग्गमनकालेsū·ri·yug·ga·ma·na·kā·le चतुरङ्गिनीca·tu·raṅ·gi·nī सेनाse·nā सन्नद्धाsan·nad·dhā वम्मिकाvam·mi·kā सुभूमेsu·bhū·me तिट्ठतु,tiṭ·ṭha·tu खग्गाkhag·gā चca धोवियन्तू’ति।dho·vi·yan·tū

     ‘tathā, deva, nimittāni dissanti, sve sūriyuggamanakāle caturaṅginī senā sannaddhā vammikā subhūme tiṭṭhatu, khaggā ca dhoviyantū’ti.

     ‘The omens are such, sir, that tomorrow you should have the fully equipped fourfold army arrayed on even ground at sunrise and have the swords washed.’

196. 196

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve ब्रह्मदत्तोbrah·ma·dat·to कासिराजाkā·si·rā·jā मनुस्सेma·nus·se आणापेसि—‘यथा,ā·ṇā·pe·si भणे,bha·ṇe पुरोहितोpu·ro·hi·to ब्राह्मणोbrāh·ma·ṇo आहā·ha तथाta·thā करोथा’ति।ka·ro·thā

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, brahmadatto kāsirājā manusse āṇāpesi—‘yathā, bhaṇe, purohito brāhmaṇo āha tathā karothā’ti.

     The king told his people to act accordingly.

197. 197

     अलभिa·la·bhi खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दीघीतिस्सdī·ghī·tis·sa कोसलरञ्ञोko·sa·la·rañ·ño महेसीma·he·sī सूरियस्सsū·ri·yas·sa उग्गमनकालेug·ga·ma·na·kā·le चतुरङ्गिनिंca·tu·raṅ·gi·niṃ सेनंse·naṃ सन्नद्धंsan·nad·dhaṃ वम्मिकंvam·mi·kaṃ सुभूमेsu·bhū·me ठितंṭhi·taṃ पस्सितुं,pas·si·tuṃ खग्गानञ्चkhag·gā·nañ·ca धोवनंdho·va·naṃ पातुं।pā·tuṃ

     Alabhi kho, bhikkhave, dīghītissa kosalarañño mahesī sūriyassa uggamanakāle caturaṅginiṁ senaṁ sannaddhaṁ vammikaṁ subhūme ṭhitaṁ passituṁ, khaggānañca dhovanaṁ pātuṁ.

     As a consequence, the queen was able to satisfy her craving.

198. 198

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दीघीतिस्सdī·ghī·tis·sa कोसलरञ्ञोko·sa·la·rañ·ño महेसीma·he·sī तस्सtas·sa गब्भस्सgab·bhas·sa परिपाकमन्वायpa·ri·pā·ka·man·vā·ya पुत्तंput·taṃ विजायि।vi·jā·yi

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, dīghītissa kosalarañño mahesī tassa gabbhassa paripākamanvāya puttaṁ vijāyi.

     When she reached her term, the queen gave birth to a son.

199. 199

     तस्सtas·sa दीघावूतिdī·ghā·vū·ti नामंnā·maṃ अकंसु।a·kaṃ·su

     Tassa dīghāvūti nāmaṁ akaṁsu.

     They called him Dīghāvu.

200. 200

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दीघावुdī·ghā·vu कुमारोku·mā·ro नचिरस्सेवna·ci·ras·se·va विञ्ञुतंviñ·ñu·taṃ पापुणि।pā·pu·ṇi

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, dīghāvu kumāro nacirasseva viññutaṁ pāpuṇi.

     Soon enough Prince Dīghāvu became self-reliant.

201. 201

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दीघीतिस्सdī·ghī·tis·sa कोसलरञ्ञोko·sa·la·rañ·ño एतदहोसि—‘अयंe·ta·da·ho·si खोkho ब्रह्मदत्तोbrah·ma·dat·to कासिराजाkā·si·rā·jā बहुनोba·hu·no अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ अनत्थस्सa·nat·thas·sa कारको,kā·ra·ko इमिनाi·mi·nā अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ बलञ्चba·lañ·ca वाहनञ्चvā·ha·nañ·ca जनपदोja·na·pa·do चca कोसोko·so चca कोट्ठागारञ्चkoṭ·ṭhā·gā·rañ·ca अच्छिन्नं,ac·chin·naṃ सचायंsa·cā·yaṃ अम्हेam·he जानिस्सति,jā·nis·sa·ti सब्बेवsab·be·va तयोta·yo घातापेस्सति,ghā·tā·pes·sa·ti यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ दीघावुंdī·ghā·vuṃ कुमारंku·mā·raṃ बहिनगरेba·hi·na·ga·re वासेय्यन्’ति।vā·sey·yan

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, dīghītissa kosalarañño etadahosi—‘ayaṁ kho brahmadatto kāsirājā bahuno amhākaṁ anatthassa kārako, iminā amhākaṁ balañca vāhanañca janapado ca koso ca koṭṭhāgārañca acchinnaṁ, sacāyaṁ amhe jānissati, sabbeva tayo ghātāpessati, yannūnāhaṁ dīghāvuṁ kumāraṁ bahinagare vāseyyan’ti.

     King Dīghīti thought, ‘This King Brahmadatta has caused us much misfortune; he’s taken our army, our vehicles and transport animals, and our country and wealth. If he finds out about us, he’ll kill all three of us. Let me take Prince Dīghāvu to live out of town.’

202. 202

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवो,bhik·kha·vo दीघीतिdī·ghī·ti कोसलराजाko·sa·la·rā·jā दीघावुंdī·ghā·vuṃ कुमारंku·mā·raṃ बहिनगरेba·hi·na·ga·re वासेसि।vā·se·si

     Atha kho, bhikkhavo, dīghīti kosalarājā dīghāvuṁ kumāraṁ bahinagare vāsesi.

     And he did just that.

203. 203

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दीघावुdī·ghā·vu कुमारोku·mā·ro बहिनगरेba·hi·na·ga·re पटिवसन्तोpa·ṭi·va·san·to नचिरस्सेवna·ci·ras·se·va सब्बसिप्पानिsab·ba·sip·pā·ni सिक्खि।sik·khi

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, dīghāvu kumāro bahinagare paṭivasanto nacirasseva sabbasippāni sikkhi.

     As he was living outside of town, Prince Dīghāvu was soon training in all branches of knowledge.

204. 204

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na दीघीतिस्सdī·ghī·tis·sa कोसलरञ्ञोko·sa·la·rañ·ño कप्पकोkap·pa·ko ब्रह्मदत्तेbrah·ma·dat·te कासिरञ्ञेkā·si·rañ·ñe पटिवसति।pa·ṭi·va·sa·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena dīghītissa kosalarañño kappako brahmadatte kāsiraññe paṭivasati.

     At this time King Dīghīti’s old barber was living at King Brahmadatta’s court.

205. 205

     अद्दसाad·da·sā खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दीघीतिस्सdī·ghī·tis·sa कोसलरञ्ञोko·sa·la·rañ·ño कप्पकोkap·pa·ko दीघीतिंdī·ghī·tiṃ कोसलराजानंko·sa·la·rā·jā·naṃ सपजापतिकंsa·pa·jā·pa·ti·kaṃ बाराणसियंbā·rā·ṇa·si·yaṃ अञ्ञतरस्मिंañ·ña·ta·ras·miṃ पच्चन्तिमेpac·can·ti·me ओकासेo·kā·se कुम्भकारनिवेसनेkum·bha·kā·ra·ni·ve·sa·ne अञ्ञातकवेसेनañ·ñā·ta·ka·ve·se·na परिब्बाजकच्छन्नेनpa·rib·bā·ja·kac·chan·ne·na पटिवसन्तं,pa·ṭi·va·san·taṃ दिस्वानdis·vā·na येनye·na ब्रह्मदत्तोbrah·ma·dat·to कासिराजाkā·si·rā·jā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā ब्रह्मदत्तंbrah·ma·dat·taṃ कासिराजानंkā·si·rā·jā·naṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Addasā kho, bhikkhave, dīghītissa kosalarañño kappako dīghītiṁ kosalarājānaṁ sapajāpatikaṁ bārāṇasiyaṁ aññatarasmiṁ paccantime okāse kumbhakāranivesane aññātakavesena paribbājakacchannena paṭivasantaṁ, disvāna yena brahmadatto kāsirājā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā brahmadattaṁ kāsirājānaṁ etadavoca—

     On one occasion he saw King Dīghīti and his wife staying in that potter’s house, disguised as wanderers. He then went to King Brahmadatta and told him.

206. 206

     ‘दीघीति,dī·ghī·ti देव,de·va कोसलराजाko·sa·la·rā·jā सपजापतिकोsa·pa·jā·pa·ti·ko बाराणसियंbā·rā·ṇa·si·yaṃ अञ्ञतरस्मिंañ·ña·ta·ras·miṃ पच्चन्तिमेpac·can·ti·me ओकासेo·kā·se कुम्भकारनिवेसनेkum·bha·kā·ra·ni·ve·sa·ne अञ्ञातकवेसेनañ·ñā·ta·ka·ve·se·na परिब्बाजकच्छन्नेनpa·rib·bā·ja·kac·chan·ne·na पटिवसती’ति।pa·ṭi·va·sa·tī

     ‘dīghīti, deva, kosalarājā sapajāpatiko bārāṇasiyaṁ aññatarasmiṁ paccantime okāse kumbhakāranivesane aññātakavesena paribbājakacchannena paṭivasatī’ti.

     (Pāli only)

207. 207

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve ब्रह्मदत्तोbrah·ma·dat·to कासिराजाkā·si·rā·jā मनुस्सेma·nus·se आणापेसि—‘तेनā·ṇā·pe·si हि,hi भणे,bha·ṇe दीघीतिंdī·ghī·tiṃ कोसलराजानंko·sa·la·rā·jā·naṃ सपजापतिकंsa·pa·jā·pa·ti·kaṃ आनेथा’ति।ā·ne·thā

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, brahmadatto kāsirājā manusse āṇāpesi—‘tena hi, bhaṇe, dīghītiṁ kosalarājānaṁ sapajāpatikaṁ ānethā’ti.

     The king ordered his people to get King Dīghīti and his wife.

208. 208

     ‘एवं,e·vaṃ देवा’तिde·vā खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तेte मनुस्साma·nus·sā ब्रह्मदत्तस्सbrah·ma·dat·tas·sa कासिरञ्ञोkā·si·rañ·ño पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā दीघीतिंdī·ghī·tiṃ कोसलराजानंko·sa·la·rā·jā·naṃ सपजापतिकंsa·pa·jā·pa·ti·kaṃ आनेसुं।ā·ne·suṃ

     ‘Evaṁ, devā’ti kho, bhikkhave, te manussā brahmadattassa kāsirañño paṭissutvā dīghītiṁ kosalarājānaṁ sapajāpatikaṁ ānesuṁ.

     When they had done so,

209. 209

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve ब्रह्मदत्तोbrah·ma·dat·to कासिराजाkā·si·rā·jā मनुस्सेma·nus·se आणापेसि—ā·ṇā·pe·si

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, brahmadatto kāsirājā manusse āṇāpesi—

     he said,

210. 210

     ‘तेनte·na हि,hi भणे,bha·ṇe दीघीतिंdī·ghī·tiṃ कोसलराजानंko·sa·la·rā·jā·naṃ सपजापतिकंsa·pa·jā·pa·ti·kaṃ दळ्हायda·ḷhā·ya रज्जुयाraj·ju·yā पच्छाबाहंpac·chā·bā·haṃ गाळ्हबन्धनंgā·ḷha·ban·dha·naṃ बन्धित्वाban·dhit·vā खुरमुण्डंkhu·ra·muṇ·ḍaṃ करित्वाka·rit·vā खरस्सरेनkha·ras·sa·re·na पणवेनpa·ṇa·ve·na रथिकायra·thi·kā·ya रथिकंra·thi·kaṃ सिङ्घाटकेनsiṅ·ghā·ṭa·ke·na सिङ्घाटकंsiṅ·ghā·ṭa·kaṃ परिनेत्वाpa·ri·net·vā दक्खिणेनdak·khi·ṇe·na द्वारेनdvā·re·na निक्खामेत्वाnik·khā·met·vā दक्खिणतोdak·khi·ṇa·to नगरस्सna·ga·ras·sa चतुधाca·tu·dhā छिन्दित्वाchin·dit·vā चतुद्दिसाca·tud·di·sā बिलानिbi·lā·ni निक्खिपथा’ति।nik·khi·pa·thā

     ‘tena hi, bhaṇe, dīghītiṁ kosalarājānaṁ sapajāpatikaṁ daḷhāya rajjuyā pacchābāhaṁ gāḷhabandhanaṁ bandhitvā khuramuṇḍaṁ karitvā kharassarena paṇavena rathikāya rathikaṁ siṅghāṭakena siṅghāṭakaṁ parinetvā dakkhiṇena dvārena nikkhāmetvā dakkhiṇato nagarassa catudhā chinditvā catuddisā bilāni nikkhipathā’ti.

     ‘Bind their arms behind their backs with a strong rope and shave their heads. Parade them from street to street and square to square to the beat of a harsh drum. Then take them out of town through the southern gate, cut them in four, and place the pieces at the four directions.’

211. 211

     ‘एवं,e·vaṃ देवा’तिde·vā खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तेte मनुस्साma·nus·sā ब्रह्मदत्तस्सbrah·ma·dat·tas·sa कासिरञ्ञोkā·si·rañ·ño पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā दीघीतिंdī·ghī·tiṃ कोसलराजानंko·sa·la·rā·jā·naṃ सपजापतिकंsa·pa·jā·pa·ti·kaṃ दळ्हायda·ḷhā·ya रज्जुयाraj·ju·yā पच्छाबाहंpac·chā·bā·haṃ गाळ्हबन्धनंgā·ḷha·ban·dha·naṃ बन्धित्वाban·dhit·vā खुरमुण्डंkhu·ra·muṇ·ḍaṃ करित्वाka·rit·vā खरस्सरेनkha·ras·sa·re·na पणवेनpa·ṇa·ve·na रथिकायra·thi·kā·ya रथिकंra·thi·kaṃ सिङ्घाटकेनsiṅ·ghā·ṭa·ke·na सिङ्घाटकंsiṅ·ghā·ṭa·kaṃ परिनेन्ति।pa·ri·nen·ti

     ‘Evaṁ, devā’ti kho, bhikkhave, te manussā brahmadattassa kāsirañño paṭissutvā dīghītiṁ kosalarājānaṁ sapajāpatikaṁ daḷhāya rajjuyā pacchābāhaṁ gāḷhabandhanaṁ bandhitvā khuramuṇḍaṁ karitvā kharassarena paṇavena rathikāya rathikaṁ siṅghāṭakena siṅghāṭakaṁ parinenti.

     Saying, ‘Yes, sir,’ they bound and shaved King Dīghīti and his wife, and paraded them as instructed.

212. 212

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दीघावुस्सdī·ghā·vus·sa कुमारस्सku·mā·ras·sa एतदहोसि—‘चिरंदिट्ठाe·ta·da·ho·si खोkho मेme मातापितरो।mā·tā·pi·ta·ro यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ मातापितरोmā·tā·pi·ta·ro पस्सेय्यन्’ति।pas·sey·yan

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, dīghāvussa kumārassa etadahosi—‘ciraṁdiṭṭhā kho me mātāpitaro. Yannūnāhaṁ mātāpitaro passeyyan’ti.

     Just then Prince Dīghāvu thought, ‘I haven’t seen my parents for a long time. Why don’t I pay them a visit?’

213. 213

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दीघावुdī·ghā·vu कुमारोku·mā·ro बाराणसिंbā·rā·ṇa·siṃ पविसित्वाpa·vi·sit·vā अद्दसad·da·sa मातापितरोmā·tā·pi·ta·ro दळ्हायda·ḷhā·ya रज्जुयाraj·ju·yā पच्छाबाहंpac·chā·bā·haṃ गाळ्हबन्धनंgā·ḷha·ban·dha·naṃ बन्धित्वाban·dhit·vā खुरमुण्डंkhu·ra·muṇ·ḍaṃ करित्वाka·rit·vā खरस्सरेनkha·ras·sa·re·na पणवेनpa·ṇa·ve·na रथिकायra·thi·kā·ya रथिकंra·thi·kaṃ सिङ्घाटकेनsiṅ·ghā·ṭa·ke·na सिङ्घाटकंsiṅ·ghā·ṭa·kaṃ परिनेन्ते,pa·ri·nen·te दिस्वानdis·vā·na येनye·na मातापितरोmā·tā·pi·ta·ro तेनुपसङ्कमि।te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, dīghāvu kumāro bārāṇasiṁ pavisitvā addasa mātāpitaro daḷhāya rajjuyā pacchābāhaṁ gāḷhabandhanaṁ bandhitvā khuramuṇḍaṁ karitvā kharassarena paṇavena rathikāya rathikaṁ siṅghāṭakena siṅghāṭakaṁ parinente, disvāna yena mātāpitaro tenupasaṅkami.

     When he entered Benares, he saw what was happening to his parents.

214. 214

     अद्दसाad·da·sā खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दीघीतिdī·ghī·ti कोसलराजाko·sa·la·rā·jā दीघावुंdī·ghā·vuṃ कुमारंku·mā·raṃ दूरतोवdū·ra·to·va आगच्छन्तं;ā·gac·chan·taṃ दिस्वानdis·vā·na दीघावुंdī·ghā·vuṃ कुमारंku·mā·raṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Addasā kho, bhikkhave, dīghīti kosalarājā dīghāvuṁ kumāraṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ; disvāna dīghāvuṁ kumāraṁ etadavoca—

     As he approached them, King Dīghīti said to him,

215. 215

     ‘माmā खोkho त्वं,tvaṃ तातtā·ta दीघावु,dī·ghā·vu दीघंdī·ghaṃ पस्स,pas·sa माmā रस्सं।ras·saṃ

     ‘mā kho tvaṁ, tāta dīghāvu, dīghaṁ passa, mā rassaṁ.

     ‘My dear Dīghāvu, see neither long nor short.

216. 216

     नna हि,hi तातtā·ta दीघावु,dī·ghā·vu वेरेनve·re·na वेराve·rā सम्मन्ति;sam·man·ti

     Na hi, tāta dīghāvu, verena verā sammanti;

     For hatred never ends through hatred;

217. 217

     अवेरेनa·ve·re·na हि,hi तातtā·ta दीघावु,dī·ghā·vu वेराve·rā सम्मन्ती’ति।sam·man·tī

     averena hi, tāta dīghāvu, verā sammantī’ti.

     hatred only ends through love.’

218. 218

     एवंe·vaṃ वुत्ते,vut·te भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तेte मनुस्साma·nus·sā दीघीतिंdī·ghī·tiṃ कोसलराजानंko·sa·la·rā·jā·naṃ एतदवोचुं—‘उम्मत्तकोe·ta·da·vo·cuṃ अयंa·yaṃ दीघीतिdī·ghī·ti कोसलराजाko·sa·la·rā·jā विप्पलपति।vip·pa·la·pa·ti

     Evaṁ vutte, bhikkhave, te manussā dīghītiṁ kosalarājānaṁ etadavocuṁ—‘ummattako ayaṁ dīghīti kosalarājā vippalapati.

     The people there said to King Dīghīti, ‘You’re insane, King Dīghīti, you’re babbling.

219. 219

     कोko इमस्सi·mas·sa दीघावु?dī·ghā·vu

     Ko imassa dīghāvu?

     Who’s Dīghāvu?

220. 220

     कंkaṃ अयंa·yaṃ एवमाह—माe·va·mā·ha खोkho त्वं,tvaṃ तातtā·ta दीघावु,dī·ghā·vu दीघंdī·ghaṃ पस्स,pas·sa माmā रस्सं।ras·saṃ

     Kaṁ ayaṁ evamāha—mā kho tvaṁ, tāta dīghāvu, dīghaṁ passa, mā rassaṁ.

     Who are you saying this to?’

221. 221

     नna हि,hi तातtā·ta दीघावु,dī·ghā·vu वेरेनve·re·na वेराve·rā सम्मन्ति;sam·man·ti

     Na hi, tāta dīghāvu, verena verā sammanti;

     (Pāli only)

222. 222

     अवेरेनa·ve·re·na हि,hi तातtā·ta दीघावु,dī·ghā·vu वेराve·rā सम्मन्ती’ति।sam·man·tī

     averena hi, tāta dīghāvu, verā sammantī’ti.

     (Pāli only)

223. 223

     ‘नाहं,nā·haṃ भणे,bha·ṇe उम्मत्तकोum·mat·ta·ko विप्पलपामि,vip·pa·la·pā·mi अपिa·pi चca योyo विञ्ञूviñ·ñū सोso विभावेस्सती’ति।vi·bhā·ves·sa·tī

     ‘Nāhaṁ, bhaṇe, ummattako vippalapāmi, api ca yo viññū so vibhāvessatī’ti.

     ‘I’m not insane, I’m not babbling. The wise will understand.’

224. 224

     दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi खो,kho भिक्खवेbhik·kha·ve …पे…pe

     Dutiyampi kho, bhikkhave …pe…

     King Dīghīti repeated what he had said to the prince a second

225. 225

     ततियम्पिta·ti·yam·pi खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दीघीतिdī·ghī·ti कोसलराजाko·sa·la·rā·jā दीघावुंdī·ghā·vuṃ कुमारंku·mā·raṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     tatiyampi kho, bhikkhave, dīghīti kosalarājā dīghāvuṁ kumāraṁ etadavoca—

     and a third time, and the people there reacted as before.

226. 226

     ‘माmā खोkho त्वं,tvaṃ तातtā·ta दीघावु,dī·ghā·vu दीघंdī·ghaṃ पस्स,pas·sa माmā रस्सं।ras·saṃ

     ‘mā kho tvaṁ, tāta dīghāvu, dīghaṁ passa, mā rassaṁ.

     (Pāli only)

227. 227

     नna हि,hi तातtā·ta दीघावु,dī·ghā·vu वेरेनve·re·na वेराve·rā सम्मन्ति;sam·man·ti

     Na hi, tāta dīghāvu, verena verā sammanti;

     (Pāli only)

228. 228

     अवेरेनa·ve·re·na हि,hi तातtā·ta दीघावु,dī·ghā·vu वेराve·rā सम्मन्ती’ति।sam·man·tī

     averena hi, tāta dīghāvu, verā sammantī’ti.

     (Pāli only)

229. 229

     ततियम्पिta·ti·yam·pi खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तेte मनुस्साma·nus·sā दीघीतिंdī·ghī·tiṃ कोसलराजानंko·sa·la·rā·jā·naṃ एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

     Tatiyampi kho, bhikkhave, te manussā dīghītiṁ kosalarājānaṁ etadavocuṁ—

     (Pāli only)

230. 230

     ‘उम्मत्तकोum·mat·ta·ko अयंa·yaṃ दीघीतिdī·ghī·ti कोसलराजाko·sa·la·rā·jā विप्पलपति।vip·pa·la·pa·ti

     ‘ummattako ayaṁ dīghīti kosalarājā vippalapati.

     (Pāli only)

231. 231

     कोko इमस्सi·mas·sa दीघावु?dī·ghā·vu

     Ko imassa dīghāvu?

     (Pāli only)

232. 232

     कंkaṃ अयंa·yaṃ एवमाह—e·va·mā·ha

     Kaṁ ayaṁ evamāha—

     (Pāli only)

233. 233

     “माmā खोkho त्वं,tvaṃ तातtā·ta दीघावु,dī·ghā·vu दीघंdī·ghaṃ पस्स,pas·sa माmā रस्सं।ras·saṃ

     “mā kho tvaṁ, tāta dīghāvu, dīghaṁ passa, mā rassaṁ.

     (Pāli only)

234. 234

     नna हि,hi तातtā·ta दीघावु,dī·ghā·vu वेरेनve·re·na वेराve·rā सम्मन्ति;sam·man·ti

     Na hi, tāta dīghāvu, verena verā sammanti;

     (Pāli only)

235. 235

     अवेरेनa·ve·re·na हि,hi तातtā·ta दीघावु,dī·ghā·vu वेराve·rā सम्मन्ती”’ति।sam·man·tī

     averena hi, tāta dīghāvu, verā sammantī”’ti.

     (Pāli only)

236. 236

     ‘नाहं,nā·haṃ भणे,bha·ṇe उम्मत्तकोum·mat·ta·ko विप्पलपामि,vip·pa·la·pā·mi अपिa·pi चca योyo विञ्ञूviñ·ñū सोso विभावेस्सती’ति।vi·bhā·ves·sa·tī

     ‘Nāhaṁ, bhaṇe, ummattako vippalapāmi, api ca yo viññū so vibhāvessatī’ti.

     (Pāli only)

237. 237

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तेte मनुस्साma·nus·sā दीघीतिंdī·ghī·tiṃ कोसलराजानंko·sa·la·rā·jā·naṃ सपजापतिकंsa·pa·jā·pa·ti·kaṃ रथिकायra·thi·kā·ya रथिकंra·thi·kaṃ सिङ्घाटकेनsiṅ·ghā·ṭa·ke·na सिङ्घाटकंsiṅ·ghā·ṭa·kaṃ परिनेत्वाpa·ri·net·vā दक्खिणेनdak·khi·ṇe·na द्वारेनdvā·re·na निक्खामेत्वाnik·khā·met·vā दक्खिणतोdak·khi·ṇa·to नगरस्सna·ga·ras·sa चतुधाca·tu·dhā छिन्दित्वाchin·dit·vā चतुद्दिसाca·tud·di·sā बिलानिbi·lā·ni निक्खिपित्वाnik·khi·pit·vā गुम्बंgum·baṃ ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā पक्कमिंसु।pak·ka·miṃ·su

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, te manussā dīghītiṁ kosalarājānaṁ sapajāpatikaṁ rathikāya rathikaṁ siṅghāṭakena siṅghāṭakaṁ parinetvā dakkhiṇena dvārena nikkhāmetvā dakkhiṇato nagarassa catudhā chinditvā catuddisā bilāni nikkhipitvā gumbaṁ ṭhapetvā pakkamiṁsu.

     Then, when the parading was finished, they took King Dīghīti and his wife through the southern gate and cut them in four. They placed the pieces at the four directions, set up guard, and departed.

238. 238

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दीघावुdī·ghā·vu कुमारोku·mā·ro बाराणसिंbā·rā·ṇa·siṃ पविसित्वाpa·vi·sit·vā सुरंsu·raṃ नीहरित्वाnī·ha·rit·vā गुम्बियेgum·bi·ye पायेसि।pā·ye·si

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, dīghāvu kumāro bārāṇasiṁ pavisitvā suraṁ nīharitvā gumbiye pāyesi.

     Prince Dīghāvu entered Benares, brought back some alcohol, and gave it to the guards.

239. 239

     यदाya·dā तेte मत्ताmat·tā अहेसुंa·he·suṃ पतिता,pa·ti·tā अथa·tha कट्ठानिkaṭ·ṭhā·ni सङ्कड्ढित्वाsaṅ·kaḍ·ḍhit·vā चितकंci·ta·kaṃ करित्वाka·rit·vā मातापितूनंmā·tā·pi·tū·naṃ सरीरंsa·rī·raṃ चितकंci·ta·kaṃ आरोपेत्वाā·ro·pet·vā अग्गिंag·giṃ दत्वाdat·vā पञ्जलिकोpañ·ja·li·ko तिक्खत्तुंtik·khat·tuṃ चितकंci·ta·kaṃ पदक्खिणंpa·dak·khi·ṇaṃ अकासि।a·kā·si

     Yadā te mattā ahesuṁ patitā, atha kaṭṭhāni saṅkaḍḍhitvā citakaṁ karitvā mātāpitūnaṁ sarīraṁ citakaṁ āropetvā aggiṁ datvā pañjaliko tikkhattuṁ citakaṁ padakkhiṇaṁ akāsi.

     When they were lying drunken on the ground, he collected sticks, built a funeral pyre, and placed his parents’ remains on top. He then lit the pyre, and raising his joined palms, he circumambulated it with his right side toward it.

240. 240

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na ब्रह्मदत्तोbrah·ma·dat·to कासिराजाkā·si·rā·jā उपरिपासादवरगतोu·pa·ri·pā·sā·da·va·ra·ga·to होति।ho·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena brahmadatto kāsirājā uparipāsādavaragato hoti.

     Just then King Brahmadatta was up in his finest stilt house,

241. 241

     अद्दसाad·da·sā खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve ब्रह्मदत्तोbrah·ma·dat·to कासिराजाkā·si·rā·jā दीघावुंdī·ghā·vuṃ कुमारंku·mā·raṃ पञ्जलिकंpañ·ja·li·kaṃ तिक्खत्तुंtik·khat·tuṃ चितकंci·ta·kaṃ पदक्खिणंpa·dak·khi·ṇaṃ करोन्तं,ka·ron·taṃ दिस्वानस्सdis·vā·nas·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     Addasā kho, bhikkhave, brahmadatto kāsirājā dīghāvuṁ kumāraṁ pañjalikaṁ tikkhattuṁ citakaṁ padakkhiṇaṁ karontaṁ, disvānassa etadahosi—

     and he saw Prince Dīghāvu doing those funeral rites. He thought,

242. 242

     ‘निस्संसयंnis·saṃ·sa·yaṃ खोkho सोso मनुस्सोma·nus·so दीघीतिस्सdī·ghī·tis·sa कोसलरञ्ञोko·sa·la·rañ·ño ञातिñā·ti वाvā सालोहितोsā·lo·hi·to वा,vā अहोa·ho मेme अनत्थतो,a·nat·tha·to नna हिhi नामnā·ma मेme कोचिko·ci आरोचेस्सती’ति।ā·ro·ces·sa·tī

     ‘nissaṁsayaṁ kho so manusso dīghītissa kosalarañño ñāti vā sālohito vā, aho me anatthato, na hi nāma me koci ārocessatī’ti.

     ‘No doubt this is a relative of King Dīghīti. This is surely a sign of trouble for me, in that nobody has told me.’

243. 243

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दीघावुdī·ghā·vu कुमारोku·mā·ro अरञ्ञंa·rañ·ñaṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā यावदत्थंyā·va·dat·thaṃ कन्दित्वाkan·dit·vā रोदित्वाro·dit·vā खप्पंkhap·paṃ पुञ्छित्वाpuñ·chit·vā बाराणसिंbā·rā·ṇa·siṃ पविसित्वाpa·vi·sit·vā अन्तेपुरस्सan·te·pu·ras·sa सामन्ताsā·man·tā हत्थिसालंhat·thi·sā·laṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā हत्थाचरियंhat·thā·ca·ri·yaṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, dīghāvu kumāro araññaṁ gantvā yāvadatthaṁ kanditvā roditvā khappaṁ puñchitvā bārāṇasiṁ pavisitvā antepurassa sāmantā hatthisālaṁ gantvā hatthācariyaṁ etadavoca—

     The prince then went into the wilderness and cried his heart out. Wiping away his tears, he entered Benares and went to the elephant stables next to the royal compound. He said to the elephant trainer,

244. 244

     ‘इच्छामहं,ic·chā·ma·haṃ आचरिय,ā·ca·ri·ya सिप्पंsip·paṃ सिक्खितुन्’ति।sik·khi·tun

     ‘icchāmahaṁ, ācariya, sippaṁ sikkhitun’ti.

     ‘Teacher, I wish to learn your profession.’

245. 245

     ‘तेनte·na हि,hi भणेbha·ṇe माणवक,mā·ṇa·va·ka सिक्खस्सू’ति।sik·khas·sū

     ‘Tena hi, bhaṇe māṇavaka, sikkhassū’ti.

     ‘Well then, young brahmin, I’ll teach you.’

246. 246

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दीघावुdī·ghā·vu कुमारोku·mā·ro रत्तियाrat·ti·yā पच्चूससमयंpac·cū·sa·sa·ma·yaṃ पच्चुट्ठायpac·cuṭ·ṭhā·ya हत्थिसालायंhat·thi·sā·lā·yaṃ मञ्जुनाmañ·ju·nā सरेनsa·re·na गायि,gā·yi वीणञ्चvī·ṇañ·ca वादेसि।vā·de·si

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, dīghāvu kumāro rattiyā paccūsasamayaṁ paccuṭṭhāya hatthisālāyaṁ mañjunā sarena gāyi, vīṇañca vādesi.

     Soon the prince was getting up early in the morning, singing sweetly and playing his lute in the elephant stables.

247. 247

     अस्सोसिas·so·si खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve ब्रह्मदत्तोbrah·ma·dat·to कासिराजाkā·si·rā·jā रत्तियाrat·ti·yā पच्चूससमयंpac·cū·sa·sa·ma·yaṃ पच्चुट्ठायpac·cuṭ·ṭhā·ya हत्थिसालायंhat·thi·sā·lā·yaṃ मञ्जुनाmañ·ju·nā सरेनsa·re·na गीतंgī·taṃ वीणञ्चvī·ṇañ·ca वादितं,vā·di·taṃ सुत्वानsut·vā·na मनुस्सेma·nus·se पुच्छि—puc·chi

     Assosi kho, bhikkhave, brahmadatto kāsirājā rattiyā paccūsasamayaṁ paccuṭṭhāya hatthisālāyaṁ mañjunā sarena gītaṁ vīṇañca vāditaṁ, sutvāna manusse pucchi—

     King Brahmadatta, too, was getting up early, and he heard that music. He asked his people

248. 248

     ‘को,ko भणे,bha·ṇe रत्तियाrat·ti·yā पच्चूससमयंpac·cū·sa·sa·ma·yaṃ पच्चुट्ठायpac·cuṭ·ṭhā·ya हत्थिसालायंhat·thi·sā·lā·yaṃ मञ्जुनाmañ·ju·nā सरेनsa·re·na गायि,gā·yi वीणञ्चvī·ṇañ·ca वादेसी’ति?vā·de·sī

     ‘ko, bhaṇe, rattiyā paccūsasamayaṁ paccuṭṭhāya hatthisālāyaṁ mañjunā sarena gāyi, vīṇañca vādesī’ti?

     who it was.

249. 249

     ‘अमुकस्स,a·mu·kas·sa देव,de·va हत्थाचरियस्सhat·thā·ca·ri·yas·sa अन्तेवासीan·te·vā·sī माणवकोmā·ṇa·va·ko रत्तियाrat·ti·yā पच्चूससमयंpac·cū·sa·sa·ma·yaṃ पच्चुट्ठायpac·cuṭ·ṭhā·ya हत्थिसालायंhat·thi·sā·lā·yaṃ मञ्जुनाmañ·ju·nā सरेनsa·re·na गायि,gā·yi वीणञ्चvī·ṇañ·ca वादेसी’ति।vā·de·sī

     ‘Amukassa, deva, hatthācariyassa antevāsī māṇavako rattiyā paccūsasamayaṁ paccuṭṭhāya hatthisālāyaṁ mañjunā sarena gāyi, vīṇañca vādesī’ti.

     They replied that it was a young brahmin who was an apprentice of such-and-such an elephant trainer.

250. 250

     ‘तेनte·na हि,hi भणे,bha·ṇe तंtaṃ माणवकंmā·ṇa·va·kaṃ आनेथा’ति।ā·ne·thā

     ‘Tena hi, bhaṇe, taṁ māṇavakaṁ ānethā’ti.

     ‘Well then, bring him here.’

251. 251

     ‘एवं,e·vaṃ देवा’तिde·vā खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तेte मनुस्साma·nus·sā ब्रह्मदत्तस्सbrah·ma·dat·tas·sa कासिरञ्ञोkā·si·rañ·ño पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā दीघावुंdī·ghā·vuṃ कुमारंku·mā·raṃ आनेसुं।ā·ne·suṃ

     ‘Evaṁ, devā’ti kho, bhikkhave, te manussā brahmadattassa kāsirañño paṭissutvā dīghāvuṁ kumāraṁ ānesuṁ.

     They brought the prince,

252. 252

     ‘त्वं,tvaṃ भणेbha·ṇe माणवक,mā·ṇa·va·ka रत्तियाrat·ti·yā पच्चूससमयंpac·cū·sa·sa·ma·yaṃ पच्चुट्ठायpac·cuṭ·ṭhā·ya हत्थिसालायंhat·thi·sā·lā·yaṃ मञ्जुनाmañ·ju·nā सरेनsa·re·na गायि,gā·yi वीणञ्चvī·ṇañ·ca वादेसी’ति?vā·de·sī

     ‘Tvaṁ, bhaṇe māṇavaka, rattiyā paccūsasamayaṁ paccuṭṭhāya hatthisālāyaṁ mañjunā sarena gāyi, vīṇañca vādesī’ti?

     and the king asked him whether he was the one who had been singing and playing the lute.

253. 253

     ‘एवं,e·vaṃ देवा’ति।de·vā

     ‘Evaṁ, devā’ti.

     When the prince confirmed that it was he,

254. 254

     ‘तेनte·na हिhi त्वं,tvaṃ भणेbha·ṇe माणवक,mā·ṇa·va·ka गायस्सु,gā·yas·su वीणञ्चvī·ṇañ·ca वादेही’ति।vā·de·hī

     ‘Tena hi tvaṁ, bhaṇe māṇavaka, gāyassu, vīṇañca vādehī’ti.

     the king said, ‘Well then, sing and play right here.’

255. 255

     ‘एवं,e·vaṃ देवा’तिde·vā खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दीघावुdī·ghā·vu कुमारोku·mā·ro ब्रह्मदत्तस्सbrah·ma·dat·tas·sa कासिरञ्ञोkā·si·rañ·ño पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā आराधापेक्खोā·rā·dhā·pek·kho मञ्जुनाmañ·ju·nā सरेनsa·re·na गायि,gā·yi वीणञ्चvī·ṇañ·ca वादेसि।vā·de·si

     ‘Evaṁ, devā’ti kho, bhikkhave, dīghāvu kumāro brahmadattassa kāsirañño paṭissutvā ārādhāpekkho mañjunā sarena gāyi, vīṇañca vādesi.

     Dīghāvu consented and did his best to please the king.

256. 256

     ‘त्वं,tvaṃ भणेbha·ṇe माणवक,mā·ṇa·va·ka मंmaṃ उपट्ठहा’ति।u·paṭ·ṭha·hā

     ‘Tvaṁ, bhaṇe māṇavaka, maṁ upaṭṭhahā’ti.

     The king said, ‘Now then, young man, please attend on me.’

257. 257

     ‘एवं,e·vaṃ देवा’तिde·vā खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दीघावुdī·ghā·vu कुमारोku·mā·ro ब्रह्मदत्तस्सbrah·ma·dat·tas·sa कासिरञ्ञोkā·si·rañ·ño पच्चस्सोसि।pac·cas·so·si

     ‘Evaṁ, devā’ti kho, bhikkhave, dīghāvu kumāro brahmadattassa kāsirañño paccassosi.

     The prince agreed.

258. 258

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दीघावुdī·ghā·vu कुमारोku·mā·ro ब्रह्मदत्तस्सbrah·ma·dat·tas·sa कासिरञ्ञोkā·si·rañ·ño पुब्बुट्ठायीpub·buṭ·ṭhā·yī अहोसिa·ho·si पच्छानिपातीpac·chā·ni·pā·tī किङ्कारपटिस्सावीkiṅ·kā·ra·pa·ṭis·sā·vī मनापचारीma·nā·pa·cā·rī पियवादी।pi·ya·vā·dī

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, dīghāvu kumāro brahmadattassa kāsirañño pubbuṭṭhāyī ahosi pacchānipātī kiṅkārapaṭissāvī manāpacārī piyavādī.

     The prince then got up before the king and went to bed after him. He willingly performed any services and was pleasant in his conduct and speech.

259. 259

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve ब्रह्मदत्तोbrah·ma·dat·to कासिराजाkā·si·rā·jā दीघावुंdī·ghā·vuṃ कुमारंku·mā·raṃ नचिरस्सेवna·ci·ras·se·va अब्भन्तरिमेab·bhan·ta·ri·me विस्सासिकट्ठानेvis·sā·si·kaṭ·ṭhā·ne ठपेसि।ṭha·pe·si

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, brahmadatto kāsirājā dīghāvuṁ kumāraṁ nacirasseva abbhantarime vissāsikaṭṭhāne ṭhapesi.

     Soon the king put the prince in an intimate position of trust.

260. 260

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve ब्रह्मदत्तोbrah·ma·dat·to कासिराजाkā·si·rā·jā दीघावुंdī·ghā·vuṃ कुमारंku·mā·raṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, brahmadatto kāsirājā dīghāvuṁ kumāraṁ etadavoca—

     On one occasion the king said to the prince,

261. 261

     ‘तेनte·na हि,hi भणेbha·ṇe माणवक,mā·ṇa·va·ka रथंra·thaṃ योजेहि,yo·je·hi मिगवंmi·ga·vaṃ गमिस्सामा’ति।ga·mis·sā·mā

     ‘tena hi, bhaṇe māṇavaka, rathaṁ yojehi, migavaṁ gamissāmā’ti.

     ‘Listen, young man. Harness a chariot, and let’s go hunting.’

262. 262

     ‘एवं,e·vaṃ देवा’तिde·vā खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दीघावुdī·ghā·vu कुमारोku·mā·ro ब्रह्मदत्तस्सbrah·ma·dat·tas·sa कासिरञ्ञोkā·si·rañ·ño पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā रथंra·thaṃ योजेत्वाyo·jet·vā ब्रह्मदत्तंbrah·ma·dat·taṃ कासिराजानंkā·si·rā·jā·naṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     ‘Evaṁ, devā’ti kho, bhikkhave, dīghāvu kumāro brahmadattassa kāsirañño paṭissutvā rathaṁ yojetvā brahmadattaṁ kāsirājānaṁ etadavoca—

     He did as asked and told the king,

263. 263

     ‘युत्तोyut·to खोkho ते,te देव,de·va रथो,ra·tho यस्सदानिyas·sa·dā·ni कालंkā·laṃ मञ्ञसी’ति।mañ·ña·sī

     ‘yutto kho te, deva, ratho, yassadāni kālaṁ maññasī’ti.

     ‘Sir, the chariot is ready. You may leave when you’re ready.’

264. 264

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve ब्रह्मदत्तोbrah·ma·dat·to कासिराजाkā·si·rā·jā रथंra·thaṃ अभिरुहि।a·bhi·ru·hi

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, brahmadatto kāsirājā rathaṁ abhiruhi.

     The king mounted the chariot,

265. 265

     दीघावुdī·ghā·vu कुमारोku·mā·ro रथंra·thaṃ पेसेसि।pe·se·si

     Dīghāvu kumāro rathaṁ pesesi.

     with the prince driving it.

266. 266

     तथाta·thā तथाta·thā रथंra·thaṃ पेसेसिpe·se·si यथाya·thā यथाya·thā अञ्ञेनेवañ·ñe·ne·va सेनाse·nā अगमासिa·ga·mā·si अञ्ञेनेवañ·ñe·ne·va रथो।ra·tho

     Tathā tathā rathaṁ pesesi yathā yathā aññeneva senā agamāsi aññeneva ratho.

     He then drove the chariot away from the army.

267. 267

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve ब्रह्मदत्तोbrah·ma·dat·to कासिराजाkā·si·rā·jā दूरंdū·raṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā दीघावुंdī·ghā·vuṃ कुमारंku·mā·raṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, brahmadatto kāsirājā dūraṁ gantvā dīghāvuṁ kumāraṁ etadavoca—

     When they had gone a long way, the king said to the prince,

268. 268

     ‘तेनte·na हि,hi भणेbha·ṇe माणवक,mā·ṇa·va·ka रथंra·thaṃ मुञ्चस्सु,muñ·cas·su किलन्तोम्हि,ki·lan·tom·hi निपज्जिस्सामी’ति।ni·paj·jis·sā·mī

     ‘tena hi, bhaṇe māṇavaka, rathaṁ muñcassu, kilantomhi, nipajjissāmī’ti.

     ‘Listen, unharness the chariot. I’m tired. I wish to lie down.’

269. 269

     ‘एवं,e·vaṃ देवा’तिde·vā खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दीघावुdī·ghā·vu कुमारोku·mā·ro ब्रह्मदत्तस्सbrah·ma·dat·tas·sa कासिरञ्ञोkā·si·rañ·ño पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā रथंra·thaṃ मुञ्चित्वाmuñ·cit·vā पथवियंpa·tha·vi·yaṃ पल्लङ्केनpal·laṅ·ke·na निसीदि।ni·sī·di

     ‘Evaṁ, devā’ti kho, bhikkhave, dīghāvu kumāro brahmadattassa kāsirañño paṭissutvā rathaṁ muñcitvā pathaviyaṁ pallaṅkena nisīdi.

     He did as asked and then sat down cross-legged on the ground.

270. 270

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve ब्रह्मदत्तोbrah·ma·dat·to कासिराजाkā·si·rā·jā दीघावुस्सdī·ghā·vus·sa कुमारस्सku·mā·ras·sa उच्छङ्गेuc·chaṅ·ge सीसंsī·saṃ कत्वाkat·vā सेय्यंsey·yaṃ कप्पेसि।kap·pe·si

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, brahmadatto kāsirājā dīghāvussa kumārassa ucchaṅge sīsaṁ katvā seyyaṁ kappesi.

     The king lay down, resting his head on the prince’s lap.

271. 271

     तस्सtas·sa किलन्तस्सki·lan·tas·sa मुहुत्तकेनेवmu·hut·ta·ke·ne·va निद्दाnid·dā ओक्कमि।ok·ka·mi

     Tassa kilantassa muhuttakeneva niddā okkami.

     And because he was tired, he quickly fell asleep.

272. 272

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दीघावुस्सdī·ghā·vus·sa कुमारस्सku·mā·ras·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, dīghāvussa kumārassa etadahosi—

     The prince thought,

273. 273

     ‘अयंa·yaṃ खोkho ब्रह्मदत्तोbrah·ma·dat·to कासिराजाkā·si·rā·jā बहुनोba·hu·no अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ अनत्थस्सa·nat·thas·sa कारको।kā·ra·ko

     ‘ayaṁ kho brahmadatto kāsirājā bahuno amhākaṁ anatthassa kārako.

     ‘This king has caused us much misfortune.

274. 274

     इमिनाi·mi·nā अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ बलञ्चba·lañ·ca वाहनञ्चvā·ha·nañ·ca जनपदोja·na·pa·do चca कोसोko·so चca कोट्ठागारञ्चkoṭ·ṭhā·gā·rañ·ca अच्छिन्नं।ac·chin·naṃ

     Iminā amhākaṁ balañca vāhanañca janapado ca koso ca koṭṭhāgārañca acchinnaṁ.

     He took our army, our vehicles and transport animals, and our country and wealth.

275. 275

     इमिनाi·mi·nā चca मेme मातापितरोmā·tā·pi·ta·ro हता।ha·tā

     Iminā ca me mātāpitaro hatā.

     He killed my mother and father.

276. 276

     अयंa·yaṃ ख्वस्सkhvas·sa कालोkā·lo योहंyo·haṃ वेरंve·raṃ अप्पेय्यन्’तिap·pey·yan कोसियाko·si·yā खग्गंkhag·gaṃ निब्बाहि।nib·bā·hi

     Ayaṁ khvassa kālo yohaṁ veraṁ appeyyan’ti kosiyā khaggaṁ nibbāhi.

     This is my chance to take revenge.’ And he drew his sword from its scabbard.

277. 277

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दीघावुस्सdī·ghā·vus·sa कुमारस्सku·mā·ras·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, dīghāvussa kumārassa etadahosi—

     He then thought,

278. 278

     ‘पिताpi·tā खोkho मंmaṃ मरणकालेma·ra·ṇa·kā·le अवचa·va·ca “माmā खोkho त्वं,tvaṃ तातtā·ta दीघावु,dī·ghā·vu दीघंdī·ghaṃ पस्स,pas·sa माmā रस्सं।ras·saṃ

     ‘pitā kho maṁ maraṇakāle avaca “mā kho tvaṁ, tāta dīghāvu, dīghaṁ passa, mā rassaṁ.

     ‘At the time of his death, my father said to me, “My dear Dīghāvu, see neither long nor short.

279. 279

     नna हि,hi तातtā·ta दीघावु,dī·ghā·vu वेरेनve·re·na वेराve·rā सम्मन्ति;sam·man·ti

     Na hi, tāta dīghāvu, verena verā sammanti;

     For hatred never ends through hatred;

280. 280

     अवेरेनa·ve·re·na हि,hi तातtā·ta दीघावु,dī·ghā·vu वेराve·rā सम्मन्ती”ति।sam·man·tī

     averena hi, tāta dīghāvu, verā sammantī”ti.

     hatred only ends through love.”

281. 281

     नna खोkho मेतंme·taṃ पतिरूपं,pa·ti·rū·paṃ य्वाहंyvā·haṃ पितुवचनंpi·tu·va·ca·naṃ अतिक्कमेय्यन्’तिa·tik·ka·mey·yan कोसियाko·si·yā खग्गंkhag·gaṃ पवेसेसि।pa·ve·se·si

     Na kho metaṁ patirūpaṁ, yvāhaṁ pituvacanaṁ atikkameyyan’ti kosiyā khaggaṁ pavesesi.

     It wouldn’t be right for me to ignore my father’s advice.’ And he returned the sword to its scabbard.

282. 282

     दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दीघावुस्सdī·ghā·vus·sa कुमारस्सku·mā·ras·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     Dutiyampi kho, bhikkhave, dīghāvussa kumārassa etadahosi—

     A second and a third time he had the same thoughts, and each time he ended up returning the sword to its scabbard.

283. 283

     ‘अयंa·yaṃ खोkho ब्रह्मदत्तोbrah·ma·dat·to कासिराजाkā·si·rā·jā बहुनोba·hu·no अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ अनत्थस्सa·nat·thas·sa कारको,kā·ra·ko इमिनाi·mi·nā अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ बलञ्चba·lañ·ca वाहनञ्चvā·ha·nañ·ca जनपदोja·na·pa·do चca कोसोko·so चca कोट्ठागारञ्चkoṭ·ṭhā·gā·rañ·ca अच्छिन्नं,ac·chin·naṃ इमिनाi·mi·nā चca मेme मातापितरोmā·tā·pi·ta·ro हता,ha·tā अयंa·yaṃ ख्वस्सkhvas·sa कालोkā·lo योहंyo·haṃ वेरंve·raṃ अप्पेय्यन्’तिap·pey·yan कोसियाko·si·yā खग्गंkhag·gaṃ निब्बाहि।nib·bā·hi

     ‘ayaṁ kho brahmadatto kāsirājā bahuno amhākaṁ anatthassa kārako, iminā amhākaṁ balañca vāhanañca janapado ca koso ca koṭṭhāgārañca acchinnaṁ, iminā ca me mātāpitaro hatā, ayaṁ khvassa kālo yohaṁ veraṁ appeyyan’ti kosiyā khaggaṁ nibbāhi.

     (Pāli only)

284. 284

     दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दीघावुस्सdī·ghā·vus·sa कुमारस्सku·mā·ras·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     Dutiyampi kho, bhikkhave, dīghāvussa kumārassa etadahosi—

     (Pāli only)

285. 285

     ‘पिताpi·tā खोkho मंmaṃ मरणकालेma·ra·ṇa·kā·le अवचa·va·ca “माmā खोkho त्वं,tvaṃ तातtā·ta दीघावु,dī·ghā·vu दीघंdī·ghaṃ पस्स,pas·sa माmā रस्सं,ras·saṃ नna हि,hi तातtā·ta दीघावु,dī·ghā·vu वेरेनve·re·na वेराve·rā सम्मन्ति;sam·man·ti

     ‘pitā kho maṁ maraṇakāle avaca “mā kho tvaṁ, tāta dīghāvu, dīghaṁ passa, mā rassaṁ, na hi, tāta dīghāvu, verena verā sammanti;

     (Pāli only)

286. 286

     अवेरेनa·ve·re·na हि,hi तातtā·ta दीघावु,dī·ghā·vu वेराve·rā सम्मन्ती”ति।sam·man·tī

     averena hi, tāta dīghāvu, verā sammantī”ti.

     (Pāli only)

287. 287

     नna खोkho मेतंme·taṃ पतिरूपं,pa·ti·rū·paṃ य्वाहंyvā·haṃ पितुवचनंpi·tu·va·ca·naṃ अतिक्कमेय्यन्’ति।a·tik·ka·mey·yan

     Na kho metaṁ patirūpaṁ, yvāhaṁ pituvacanaṁ atikkameyyan’ti.

     (Pāli only)

288. 288

     पुनदेवpu·na·de·va कोसियाko·si·yā खग्गंkhag·gaṃ पवेसेसि।pa·ve·se·si

     Punadeva kosiyā khaggaṁ pavesesi.

     (Pāli only)

289. 289

     ततियम्पिta·ti·yam·pi खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दीघावुस्सdī·ghā·vus·sa कुमारस्सku·mā·ras·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     Tatiyampi kho, bhikkhave, dīghāvussa kumārassa etadahosi—

     (Pāli only)

290. 290

     ‘अयंa·yaṃ खोkho ब्रह्मदत्तोbrah·ma·dat·to कासिराजाkā·si·rā·jā बहुनोba·hu·no अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ अनत्थस्सa·nat·thas·sa कारको।kā·ra·ko

     ‘ayaṁ kho brahmadatto kāsirājā bahuno amhākaṁ anatthassa kārako.

     (Pāli only)

291. 291

     इमिनाi·mi·nā अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ बलञ्चba·lañ·ca वाहनञ्चvā·ha·nañ·ca जनपदोja·na·pa·do चca कोसोko·so चca कोट्ठागारञ्चkoṭ·ṭhā·gā·rañ·ca अच्छिन्नं।ac·chin·naṃ

     Iminā amhākaṁ balañca vāhanañca janapado ca koso ca koṭṭhāgārañca acchinnaṁ.

     (Pāli only)

292. 292

     इमिनाi·mi·nā चca मेme मातापितरोmā·tā·pi·ta·ro हता।ha·tā

     Iminā ca me mātāpitaro hatā.

     (Pāli only)

293. 293

     अयंa·yaṃ ख्वस्सkhvas·sa कालोkā·lo योहंyo·haṃ वेरंve·raṃ अप्पेय्यन्’तिap·pey·yan कोसियाko·si·yā खग्गंkhag·gaṃ निब्बाहि।nib·bā·hi

     Ayaṁ khvassa kālo yohaṁ veraṁ appeyyan’ti kosiyā khaggaṁ nibbāhi.

     (Pāli only)

294. 294

     ततियम्पिta·ti·yam·pi खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दीघावुस्सdī·ghā·vus·sa कुमारस्सku·mā·ras·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     Tatiyampi kho, bhikkhave, dīghāvussa kumārassa etadahosi—

     (Pāli only)

295. 295

     ‘पिताpi·tā खोkho मंmaṃ मरणकालेma·ra·ṇa·kā·le अवचa·va·ca “माmā खोkho त्वं,tvaṃ तातtā·ta दीघावु,dī·ghā·vu दीघंdī·ghaṃ पस्स,pas·sa माmā रस्सं।ras·saṃ

     ‘pitā kho maṁ maraṇakāle avaca “mā kho tvaṁ, tāta dīghāvu, dīghaṁ passa, mā rassaṁ.

     (Pāli only)

296. 296

     नna हि,hi तातtā·ta दीघावु,dī·ghā·vu वेरेनve·re·na वेराve·rā सम्मन्ति;sam·man·ti

     Na hi, tāta dīghāvu, verena verā sammanti;

     (Pāli only)

297. 297

     अवेरेनa·ve·re·na हि,hi तातtā·ta दीघावु,dī·ghā·vu वेराve·rā सम्मन्ती”ति।sam·man·tī

     averena hi, tāta dīghāvu, verā sammantī”ti.

     (Pāli only)

298. 298

     नna खोkho मेतंme·taṃ पतिरूपं,pa·ti·rū·paṃ य्वाहंyvā·haṃ पितुवचनंpi·tu·va·ca·naṃ अतिक्कमेय्यन्’तिa·tik·ka·mey·yan पुनदेवpu·na·de·va कोसियाko·si·yā खग्गंkhag·gaṃ पवेसेसि।pa·ve·se·si

     Na kho metaṁ patirūpaṁ, yvāhaṁ pituvacanaṁ atikkameyyan’ti punadeva kosiyā khaggaṁ pavesesi.

     (Pāli only)

299. 299

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve ब्रह्मदत्तोbrah·ma·dat·to कासिराजाkā·si·rā·jā भीतोbhī·to उब्बिग्गोub·big·go उस्सङ्कीus·saṅ·kī उत्रस्तोut·ras·to सहसाsa·ha·sā वुट्ठासि।vuṭ·ṭhā·si

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, brahmadatto kāsirājā bhīto ubbiggo ussaṅkī utrasto sahasā vuṭṭhāsi.

     Just then King Brahmadatta suddenly got up, frightened and alarmed.

300. 300

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दीघावुdī·ghā·vu कुमारोku·mā·ro ब्रह्मदत्तंbrah·ma·dat·taṃ कासिराजानंkā·si·rā·jā·naṃ एतदवोच—‘किस्सe·ta·da·vo·ca त्वं,tvaṃ देव,de·va भीतोbhī·to उब्बिग्गोub·big·go उस्सङ्कीus·saṅ·kī उत्रस्तोut·ras·to सहसाsa·ha·sā वुट्ठासी’ति?vuṭ·ṭhā·sī

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, dīghāvu kumāro brahmadattaṁ kāsirājānaṁ etadavoca—‘kissa tvaṁ, deva, bhīto ubbiggo ussaṅkī utrasto sahasā vuṭṭhāsī’ti?

     The prince asked him what was the matter,

301. 301

     ‘इधi·dha मं,maṃ भणेbha·ṇe माणवक,mā·ṇa·va·ka दीघीतिस्सdī·ghī·tis·sa कोसलरञ्ञोko·sa·la·rañ·ño पुत्तोput·to दीघावुdī·ghā·vu कुमारोku·mā·ro सुपिनन्तेनsu·pi·nan·te·na खग्गेनkhag·ge·na परिपातेसि।pa·ri·pā·te·si

     ‘Idha maṁ, bhaṇe māṇavaka, dīghītissa kosalarañño putto dīghāvu kumāro supinantena khaggena paripātesi.

     and the king said, ‘I just dreamed that Prince Dīghāvu, the son of Dīghīti the king of Kosala, attacked me with a sword.’

302. 302

     तेनाहंte·nā·haṃ भीतोbhī·to उब्बिग्गोub·big·go उस्सङ्कीus·saṅ·kī उत्रस्तोut·ras·to सहसाsa·ha·sā वुट्ठासिन्’ति।vuṭ·ṭhā·sin

     Tenāhaṁ bhīto ubbiggo ussaṅkī utrasto sahasā vuṭṭhāsin’ti.

     (Pāli only)

303. 303

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दीघावुdī·ghā·vu कुमारोku·mā·ro वामेनvā·me·na हत्थेनhat·the·na ब्रह्मदत्तस्सbrah·ma·dat·tas·sa कासिरञ्ञोkā·si·rañ·ño सीसंsī·saṃ परामसित्वाpa·rā·ma·sit·vā दक्खिणेनdak·khi·ṇe·na हत्थेनhat·the·na खग्गंkhag·gaṃ निब्बाहेत्वाnib·bā·het·vā ब्रह्मदत्तंbrah·ma·dat·taṃ कासिराजानंkā·si·rā·jā·naṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, dīghāvu kumāro vāmena hatthena brahmadattassa kāsirañño sīsaṁ parāmasitvā dakkhiṇena hatthena khaggaṁ nibbāhetvā brahmadattaṁ kāsirājānaṁ etadavoca—

     Seizing the king’s head with his left hand and drawing his sword with his right hand, the prince said to the king,

304. 304

     ‘अहंa·haṃ खोkho सो,so देव,de·va दीघीतिस्सdī·ghī·tis·sa कोसलरञ्ञोko·sa·la·rañ·ño पुत्तोput·to दीघावुdī·ghā·vu कुमारो।ku·mā·ro

     ‘ahaṁ kho so, deva, dīghītissa kosalarañño putto dīghāvu kumāro.

     ‘Sir, I’m that Prince Dīghāvu, the son of Dīghīti the king of Kosala.

305. 305

     बहुनोba·hu·no त्वंtvaṃ अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ अनत्थस्सa·nat·thas·sa कारको।kā·ra·ko

     Bahuno tvaṁ amhākaṁ anatthassa kārako.

     You’ve caused us much misfortune.

306. 306

     तयाta·yā अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ बलञ्चba·lañ·ca वाहनञ्चvā·ha·nañ·ca जनपदोja·na·pa·do चca कोसोko·so चca कोट्ठागारञ्चkoṭ·ṭhā·gā·rañ·ca अच्छिन्नं।ac·chin·naṃ

     Tayā amhākaṁ balañca vāhanañca janapado ca koso ca koṭṭhāgārañca acchinnaṁ.

     You took our army, our vehicles and transport animals, and our country and wealth.

307. 307

     तयाta·yā चca मेme मातापितरोmā·tā·pi·ta·ro हता।ha·tā

     Tayā ca me mātāpitaro hatā.

     You killed my mother and father.

308. 308

     अयंa·yaṃ ख्वस्सkhvas·sa कालोkā·lo य्वाहंyvā·haṃ वेरंve·raṃ अप्पेय्यन्’ति।ap·pey·yan

     Ayaṁ khvassa kālo yvāhaṁ veraṁ appeyyan’ti.

     This is my chance to take revenge.’

309. 309

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve ब्रह्मदत्तोbrah·ma·dat·to कासिराजाkā·si·rā·jā दीघावुस्सdī·ghā·vus·sa कुमारस्सku·mā·ras·sa पादेसुpā·de·su सिरसाsi·ra·sā निपतित्वाni·pa·tit·vā दीघावुंdī·ghā·vuṃ कुमारंku·mā·raṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, brahmadatto kāsirājā dīghāvussa kumārassa pādesu sirasā nipatitvā dīghāvuṁ kumāraṁ etadavoca—

     The king bowed down with his head at the prince’s feet and said,

310. 310

     ‘जीवितंjī·vi·taṃ मे,me तातtā·ta दीघावु,dī·ghā·vu देहि।de·hi जीवितंjī·vi·taṃ मे,me तातtā·ta दीघावु,dī·ghā·vu देही’ति।de·hī

     ‘jīvitaṁ me, tāta dīghāvu, dehi. Jīvitaṁ me, tāta dīghāvu, dehī’ti.

     ‘Dear Dīghāvu, please spare my life.’

311. 311

     ‘क्याहंkyā·haṃ उस्सहामिus·sa·hā·mi देवस्सde·vas·sa जीवितंjī·vi·taṃ दातुं?dā·tuṃ

     ‘Kyāhaṁ ussahāmi devassa jīvitaṁ dātuṁ?

     ‘Who am I to spare your life?

312. 312

     देवोde·vo खोkho मेme जीवितंjī·vi·taṃ ददेय्या’ति।da·dey·yā

     Devo kho me jīvitaṁ dadeyyā’ti.

     Sir, it’s you who should spare mine.’

313. 313

     ‘तेनte·na हि,hi तातtā·ta दीघावु,dī·ghā·vu त्वञ्चेवtvañ·ce·va मेme जीवितंjī·vi·taṃ देहि,de·hi अहञ्चa·hañ·ca तेte जीवितंjī·vi·taṃ दम्मी’ति।dam·mī

     ‘Tena hi, tāta dīghāvu, tvañceva me jīvitaṁ dehi, ahañca te jīvitaṁ dammī’ti.

     ‘Well then, Dīghāvu, if you spare my life, I’ll spare yours.’

314. 314

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve ब्रह्मदत्तोbrah·ma·dat·to चca कासिराजाkā·si·rā·jā दीघावुdī·ghā·vu चca कुमारोku·mā·ro अञ्ञमञ्ञस्सañ·ña·mañ·ñas·sa जीवितंjī·vi·taṃ अदंसु,a·daṃ·su पाणिञ्चpā·ṇiñ·ca अग्गहेसुं,ag·ga·he·suṃ सपथञ्चsa·pa·thañ·ca अकंसुa·kaṃ·su अद्दूभाय।ad·dū·bhā·ya

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, brahmadatto ca kāsirājā dīghāvu ca kumāro aññamaññassa jīvitaṁ adaṁsu, pāṇiñca aggahesuṁ, sapathañca akaṁsu addūbhāya.

     The king and Dīghāvu spared each other’s lives. They shook hands and made a vow not to harm one another.

315. 315

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve ब्रह्मदत्तोbrah·ma·dat·to कासिराजाkā·si·rā·jā दीघावुंdī·ghā·vuṃ कुमारंku·mā·raṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, brahmadatto kāsirājā dīghāvuṁ kumāraṁ etadavoca—

     The king said to the prince,

316. 316

     ‘तेनte·na हि,hi तातtā·ta दीघावु,dī·ghā·vu रथंra·thaṃ योजेहि,yo·je·hi गमिस्सामा’ति।ga·mis·sā·mā

     ‘tena hi, tāta dīghāvu, rathaṁ yojehi, gamissāmā’ti.

     ‘Well then, Dīghāvu, harness the chariot and let’s go.’

317. 317

     ‘एवं,e·vaṃ देवा’तिde·vā खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दीघावुdī·ghā·vu कुमारोku·mā·ro ब्रह्मदत्तस्सbrah·ma·dat·tas·sa कासिरञ्ञोkā·si·rañ·ño पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā रथंra·thaṃ योजेत्वाyo·jet·vā ब्रह्मदत्तंbrah·ma·dat·taṃ कासिराजानंkā·si·rā·jā·naṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     ‘Evaṁ, devā’ti kho, bhikkhave, dīghāvu kumāro brahmadattassa kāsirañño paṭissutvā rathaṁ yojetvā brahmadattaṁ kāsirājānaṁ etadavoca—

     He did as asked and told to the king,

318. 318

     ‘युत्तोyut·to खोkho ते,te देव,de·va रथो,ra·tho यस्सदानिyas·sa·dā·ni कालंkā·laṃ मञ्ञसी’ति।mañ·ña·sī

     ‘yutto kho te, deva, ratho, yassadāni kālaṁ maññasī’ti.

     ‘Sir, the chariot is ready. You may leave when you’re ready.’

319. 319

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve ब्रह्मदत्तोbrah·ma·dat·to कासिराजाkā·si·rā·jā रथंra·thaṃ अभिरुहि।a·bhi·ru·hi

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, brahmadatto kāsirājā rathaṁ abhiruhi.

     The king mounted the chariot,

320. 320

     दीघावुdī·ghā·vu कुमारोku·mā·ro रथंra·thaṃ पेसेसि।pe·se·si

     Dīghāvu kumāro rathaṁ pesesi.

     with the prince driving it.

321. 321

     तथाta·thā तथाta·thā रथंra·thaṃ पेसेसिpe·se·si यथाya·thā यथाya·thā नचिरस्सेवna·ci·ras·se·va सेनायse·nā·ya समागञ्छि।sa·mā·gañ·chi

     Tathā tathā rathaṁ pesesi yathā yathā nacirasseva senāya samāgañchi.

     And he drove it so that it soon rejoined the army.

322. 322

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve ब्रह्मदत्तोbrah·ma·dat·to कासिराजाkā·si·rā·jā बाराणसिंbā·rā·ṇa·siṃ पविसित्वाpa·vi·sit·vā अमच्चेa·mac·ce पारिसज्जेpā·ri·saj·je सन्निपातापेत्वाsan·ni·pā·tā·pet·vā एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, brahmadatto kāsirājā bārāṇasiṁ pavisitvā amacce pārisajje sannipātāpetvā etadavoca—

     When he was back in Benares, the king gathered his court and said,

323. 323

     ‘सचे,sa·ce भणे,bha·ṇe दीघीतिस्सdī·ghī·tis·sa कोसलरञ्ञोko·sa·la·rañ·ño पुत्तंput·taṃ दीघावुंdī·ghā·vuṃ कुमारंku·mā·raṃ पस्सेय्याथ,pas·sey·yā·tha किन्तिkin·ti नंnaṃ करेय्याथा’ति?ka·rey·yā·thā

     ‘sace, bhaṇe, dīghītissa kosalarañño puttaṁ dīghāvuṁ kumāraṁ passeyyātha, kinti naṁ kareyyāthā’ti?

     ‘Now, let me ask you: if you saw Prince Dīghāvu, the son of Dīghīti the king of Kosala, what would you do to him?’

324. 324

     एकच्चेe·kac·ce एवमाहंसु—e·va·mā·haṃ·su

     Ekacce evamāhaṁsu—

     They variously replied,

325. 325

     ‘मयं,ma·yaṃ देव,de·va हत्थेhat·the छिन्देय्याम।chin·dey·yā·ma

     ‘mayaṁ, deva, hatthe chindeyyāma.

     ‘Sir, we’d cut off his hands;’

326. 326

     मयं,ma·yaṃ देव,de·va पादेpā·de छिन्देय्याम।chin·dey·yā·ma

     Mayaṁ, deva, pāde chindeyyāma.

     ‘We’d cut off his feet;’

327. 327

     मयं,ma·yaṃ देव,de·va हत्थपादेhat·tha·pā·de छिन्देय्याम।chin·dey·yā·ma

     Mayaṁ, deva, hatthapāde chindeyyāma.

     ‘We’d cut off both his hands and feet;’

328. 328

     मयं,ma·yaṃ देव,de·va कण्णेkaṇ·ṇe छिन्देय्याम।chin·dey·yā·ma

     Mayaṁ, deva, kaṇṇe chindeyyāma.

     ‘We’d cut off his ears;’

329. 329

     मयं,ma·yaṃ देव,de·va नासंnā·saṃ छिन्देय्याम।chin·dey·yā·ma

     Mayaṁ, deva, nāsaṁ chindeyyāma.

     ‘We’d cut off his nose;’

330. 330

     मयं,ma·yaṃ देव,de·va कण्णनासंkaṇ·ṇa·nā·saṃ छिन्देय्याम।chin·dey·yā·ma

     Mayaṁ, deva, kaṇṇanāsaṁ chindeyyāma.

     ‘We’d cut off both his ears and nose;’

331. 331

     मयं,ma·yaṃ देव,de·va सीसंsī·saṃ छिन्देय्यामा’ति।chin·dey·yā·mā

     Mayaṁ, deva, sīsaṁ chindeyyāmā’ti.

     ‘We’d cut off his head.’

332. 332

     ‘अयंa·yaṃ खो,kho भणे,bha·ṇe दीघीतिस्सdī·ghī·tis·sa कोसलरञ्ञोko·sa·la·rañ·ño पुत्तोput·to दीघावुdī·ghā·vu कुमारो।ku·mā·ro

     ‘Ayaṁ kho, bhaṇe, dīghītissa kosalarañño putto dīghāvu kumāro.

     ‘Well, this is Prince Dīghāvu, the son of Dīghīti the king of Kosala.

333. 333

     नायंnā·yaṃ लब्भाlab·bhā किञ्चिkiñ·ci कातुं।kā·tuṃ

     Nāyaṁ labbhā kiñci kātuṁ.

     You shouldn’t do anything to harm him.

334. 334

     इमिनाi·mi·nā चca मेme जीवितंjī·vi·taṃ दिन्नं,din·naṃ मयाma·yā चca इमस्सi·mas·sa जीवितंjī·vi·taṃ दिन्नन्’ति।din·nan

     Iminā ca me jīvitaṁ dinnaṁ, mayā ca imassa jīvitaṁ dinnan’ti.

     I’ve spared his life and he’s spared mine.’

335. 335

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve ब्रह्मदत्तोbrah·ma·dat·to कासिराजाkā·si·rā·jā दीघावुंdī·ghā·vuṃ कुमारंku·mā·raṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, brahmadatto kāsirājā dīghāvuṁ kumāraṁ etadavoca—

     Soon afterwards the king said to Dīghāvu,

336. 336

     ‘यंyaṃ खोkho ते,te तातtā·ta दीघावु,dī·ghā·vu पिताpi·tā मरणकालेma·ra·ṇa·kā·le अवचa·va·ca “माmā खोkho त्वं,tvaṃ तातtā·ta दीघावु,dī·ghā·vu दीघंdī·ghaṃ पस्स,pas·sa माmā रस्सं।ras·saṃ

     ‘yaṁ kho te, tāta dīghāvu, pitā maraṇakāle avaca “mā kho tvaṁ, tāta dīghāvu, dīghaṁ passa, mā rassaṁ.

     ‘Dīghāvu, what’s the meaning of that which your father told you at the time of his death?’

337. 337

     नna हि,hi तातtā·ta दीघावु,dī·ghā·vu वेरेनve·re·na वेराve·rā सम्मन्ति;sam·man·ti

     Na hi, tāta dīghāvu, verena verā sammanti;

     (Pāli only)

338. 338

     अवेरेनa·ve·re·na हि,hi तातtā·ta दीघावु,dī·ghā·vu वेराve·rā सम्मन्ती”ति,sam·man·tī किंkiṃ तेte पिताpi·tā सन्धायsan·dhā·ya अवचा’ति?a·va·cā

     averena hi, tāta dīghāvu, verā sammantī”ti, kiṁ te pitā sandhāya avacā’ti?

     (Pāli only)

339. 339

     ‘यंyaṃ खोkho मे,me देव,de·va पिताpi·tā मरणकालेma·ra·ṇa·kā·le अवचa·va·ca “माmā दीघन्”तिdī·ghan माmā चिरंci·raṃ वेरंve·raṃ अकासीति।a·kā·sī·ti

     ‘Yaṁ kho me, deva, pitā maraṇakāle avaca “mā dīghan”ti mā ciraṁ veraṁ akāsīti.

     ‘When he said, “Not long,” he meant, “Don’t harbor hate for a long time.”

340. 340

     इमंi·maṃ खोkho मे,me देव,de·va पिताpi·tā मरणकालेma·ra·ṇa·kā·le अवचa·va·ca “माmā दीघन्”ति।dī·ghan

     Imaṁ kho me, deva, pitā maraṇakāle avaca “mā dīghan”ti.

     (Pāli only)

341. 341

     यंyaṃ खोkho मे,me देव,de·va पिताpi·tā मरणकालेma·ra·ṇa·kā·le अवचa·va·ca “माmā रस्सन्”तिras·san माmā खिप्पंkhip·paṃ मित्तेहिmit·te·hi भिज्जित्थाति।bhij·jit·thā·ti

     Yaṁ kho me, deva, pitā maraṇakāle avaca “mā rassan”ti mā khippaṁ mittehi bhijjitthāti.

     When he said, “Not short,” he meant, “Don’t hastily break with your friends.”

342. 342

     इमंi·maṃ खोkho मे,me देव,de·va पिताpi·tā मरणकालेma·ra·ṇa·kā·le अवचa·va·ca “माmā रस्सन्”ति।ras·san

     Imaṁ kho me, deva, pitā maraṇakāle avaca “mā rassan”ti.

     (Pāli only)

343. 343

     यंyaṃ खोkho मे,me देव,de·va पिताpi·tā मरणकालेma·ra·ṇa·kā·le अवचa·va·ca “नna हि,hi तातtā·ta दीघावु,dī·ghā·vu वेरेनve·re·na वेराve·rā सम्मन्ति,sam·man·ti अवेरेनa·ve·re·na हि,hi तातtā·ta दीघावु,dī·ghā·vu वेराve·rā सम्मन्ती”तिsam·man·tī देवेनde·ve·na मेme मातापितरोmā·tā·pi·ta·ro हताति।ha·tā·ti

     Yaṁ kho me, deva, pitā maraṇakāle avaca “na hi, tāta dīghāvu, verena verā sammanti, averena hi, tāta dīghāvu, verā sammantī”ti devena me mātāpitaro hatāti.

     And when he said, “For hatred never ends through hatred; hatred only ends through love,” he was referring to your killing of my mother and father.

344. 344

     सचाहंsa·cā·haṃ देवंde·vaṃ जीविताjī·vi·tā वोरोपेय्यं,vo·ro·pey·yaṃ येye देवस्सde·vas·sa अत्थकामाat·tha·kā·mā तेte मंmaṃ जीविताjī·vi·tā वोरोपेय्युं,vo·ro·pey·yuṃ येye मेme अत्थकामाat·tha·kā·mā तेte तेte जीविताjī·vi·tā वोरोपेय्युं—vo·ro·pey·yuṃ

     Sacāhaṁ devaṁ jīvitā voropeyyaṁ, ye devassa atthakāmā te maṁ jīvitā voropeyyuṁ, ye me atthakāmā te te jīvitā voropeyyuṁ—

     For if I had killed you, those who wish you well would’ve killed me, and those who wish me well would in turn have killed them.

345. 345

     एवंe·vaṃ तंtaṃ वेरंve·raṃ वेरेनve·re·na नna वूपसमेय्य।vū·pa·sa·mey·ya

     evaṁ taṁ veraṁ verena na vūpasameyya.

     In this way the hatred would never end through hatred.

346. 346

     इदानिi·dā·ni चca पनpa·na मेme देवेनde·ve·na जीवितंjī·vi·taṃ दिन्नं,din·naṃ मयाma·yā चca देवस्सde·vas·sa जीवितंjī·vi·taṃ दिन्नं।din·naṃ

     Idāni ca pana me devena jīvitaṁ dinnaṁ, mayā ca devassa jīvitaṁ dinnaṁ.

     But now you’ve spared my life and I’ve spared yours.

347. 347

     एवंe·vaṃ तंtaṃ वेरंve·raṃ अवेरेनa·ve·re·na वूपसन्तं।vū·pa·san·taṃ

     Evaṁ taṁ veraṁ averena vūpasantaṁ.

     In this way hatred ends through love.’

348. 348

     इमंi·maṃ खोkho मे,me देव,de·va पिताpi·tā मरणकालेma·ra·ṇa·kā·le अवच—a·va·ca

     Imaṁ kho me, deva, pitā maraṇakāle avaca—

     (Pāli only)

349. 349

     “नna हि,hi तातtā·ta दीघावु,dī·ghā·vu वेरेनve·re·na वेराve·rā सम्मन्ति;sam·man·ti

     “na hi, tāta dīghāvu, verena verā sammanti;

     (Pāli only)

350. 350

     अवेरेनa·ve·re·na हि,hi तातtā·ta दीघावु,dī·ghā·vu वेराve·rā सम्मन्ती”’ति।sam·man·tī

     averena hi, tāta dīghāvu, verā sammantī”’ti.

     (Pāli only)

351. 351

     अथa·tha खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve ब्रह्मदत्तोbrah·ma·dat·to कासिराजा—kā·si·rā·jā

     Atha kho, bhikkhave, brahmadatto kāsirājā—

     The king thought,

352. 352

     ‘अच्छरियंac·cha·ri·yaṃ वतva·ta भो,bho अब्भुतंab·bhu·taṃ वतva·ta भो।bho

     ‘acchariyaṁ vata bho, abbhutaṁ vata bho.

     ‘It’s amazing

353. 353

     यावyā·va पण्डितोpaṇ·ḍi·to अयंa·yaṃ दीघावुdī·ghā·vu कुमारो,ku·mā·ro यत्रyat·ra हिhi नामnā·ma पितुनोpi·tu·no सङ्खित्तेनsaṅ·khit·te·na भासितस्सbhā·si·tas·sa वित्थारेनvit·thā·re·na अत्थंat·thaṃ आजानिस्सती’तिā·jā·nis·sa·tī पेत्तिकंpet·ti·kaṃ बलञ्चba·lañ·ca वाहनञ्चvā·ha·nañ·ca जनपदञ्चja·na·pa·dañ·ca कोसञ्चko·sañ·ca कोट्ठागारञ्चkoṭ·ṭhā·gā·rañ·ca पटिपादेसि,pa·ṭi·pā·de·si धीतरञ्चdhī·ta·rañ·ca अदासि।a·dā·si

     Yāva paṇḍito ayaṁ dīghāvu kumāro, yatra hi nāma pituno saṅkhittena bhāsitassa vitthārena atthaṁ ājānissatī’ti pettikaṁ balañca vāhanañca janapadañca kosañca koṭṭhāgārañca paṭipādesi, dhītarañca adāsi.

     how wise Dīghāvu is, as he’s able to fully understand the meaning of his father’s brief statement.’ He gave him back his father’s army, his vehicles and transport animals, and his country and wealth. And he also gave him his own daughter.

354. 354

     तेसञ्हिte·sañ·hi नाम,nā·ma भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve राजूनंrā·jū·naṃ आदिन्नदण्डानंā·din·na·daṇ·ḍā·naṃ आदिन्नसत्थानंā·din·na·sat·thā·naṃ एवरूपंe·va·rū·paṃ खन्तिसोरच्चंkhan·ti·so·rac·caṃ भविस्सति।bha·vis·sa·ti

     Tesañhi nāma, bhikkhave, rājūnaṁ ādinnadaṇḍānaṁ ādinnasatthānaṁ evarūpaṁ khantisoraccaṁ bhavissati.

     “In this way, monks, those kings who had the authority to punish were actually patient and gentle.

355. 355

     इधi·dha खोkho पनpa·na तं,taṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सोभेथso·bhe·tha यंyaṃ तुम्हेtum·he एवंe·vaṃ स्वाक्खातेsvāk·khā·te धम्मविनयेdham·ma·vi·na·ye पब्बजिताpab·ba·ji·tā समानाsa·mā·nā खमाkha·mā चca भवेय्याथbha·vey·yā·tha सोरताso·ra·tā चा”ति?cā

     Idha kho pana taṁ, bhikkhave, sobhetha yaṁ tumhe evaṁ svākkhāte dhammavinaye pabbajitā samānā khamā ca bhaveyyātha soratā cā”ti?

     But right here, you who’ve gone forth on this well-proclaimed spiritual path, do you shine with your patience and gentleness?”

356. 356

     ततियम्पिta·ti·yam·pi खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Tatiyampi kho bhagavā te bhikkhū etadavoca—

     A third time the Buddha said to those monks,

357. 357

     “अलं,a·laṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve माmā भण्डनंbhaṇ·ḍa·naṃ माmā कलहंka·la·haṃ माmā विग्गहंvig·ga·haṃ माmā विवादन्”ति।vi·vā·dan

     “alaṁ, bhikkhave, mā bhaṇḍanaṁ mā kalahaṁ mā viggahaṁ mā vivādan”ti.

     “Enough, monks, don’t quarrel and dispute.”

358. 358

     ततियम्पिta·ti·yam·pi खोkho सोso अधम्मवादीa·dham·ma·vā·dī भिक्खुbhik·khu भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Tatiyampi kho so adhammavādī bhikkhu bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     And a third time that monk who spoke contrary to the Teaching replied,

359. 359

     “आगमेतु,ā·ga·me·tu भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā धम्मस्सामी;dham·mas·sā·mī

     “āgametu, bhante, bhagavā dhammassāmī;

     “Wait, sir, you’re the Lord of the Teaching.

360. 360

     अप्पोस्सुक्को,ap·pos·suk·ko भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā दिट्ठधम्मसुखविहारमनुयुत्तोdiṭ·ṭha·dham·ma·su·kha·vi·hā·ra·ma·nu·yut·to विहरतु।vi·ha·ra·tu

     appossukko, bhante, bhagavā diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāramanuyutto viharatu.

     Be at ease and enjoy the happiness of meditation.

361. 361

     मयमेतेनma·ya·me·te·na भण्डनेनbhaṇ·ḍa·ne·na कलहेनka·la·he·na विग्गहेनvig·ga·he·na विवादेनvi·vā·de·na पञ्ञायिस्सामा”ति।pañ·ñā·yis·sā·mā

     Mayametena bhaṇḍanena kalahena viggahena vivādena paññāyissāmā”ti.

     We’ll face the consequences of this quarreling and disputing.”

362. 362

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवा—bha·ga·vā

     Atha kho bhagavā—

     The Buddha thought,

363. 363

     “परियादिन्नरूपाpa·ri·yā·din·na·rū·pā खोkho इमेi·me मोघपुरिसा,mo·gha·pu·ri·sā नयिमेna·yi·me सुकराsu·ka·rā सञ्ञापेतुन्”ति—sañ·ñā·pe·tun

     “pariyādinnarūpā kho ime moghapurisā, nayime sukarā saññāpetun”ti—

     “These foolish men are consumed by emotions. It’s not easy to persuade them,”

364. 364

     उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

     uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi.

     and he got up from his seat and left.

365. 365

     दीघावुभाणवारोdī·ghā·vu·bhā·ṇa·vā·ro निट्ठितोniṭ·ṭhi·to पठमो।pa·ṭha·mo

     Dīghāvubhāṇavāro niṭṭhito paṭhamo.

     The first section for recitation on Dīghāvu is finished.

366. 366

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā पुब्बण्हसमयंpub·baṇ·ha·sa·ma·yaṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā पत्तचीवरमादायpat·ta·cī·va·ra·mā·dā·ya कोसम्बिंko·sam·biṃ पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya पाविसि।pā·vi·si

     Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya kosambiṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi.

     Then, after robing up in the morning, the Buddha took his bowl and robe and entered Kosambī for alms.

367. 367

     कोसम्बियंko·sam·bi·yaṃ पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya चरित्वाca·rit·vā पच्छाभत्तंpac·chā·bhat·taṃ पिण्डपातपटिक्कन्तोpiṇ·ḍa·pā·ta·pa·ṭik·kan·to सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ संसामेत्वाsaṃ·sā·met·vā पत्तचीवरमादायpat·ta·cī·va·ra·mā·dā·ya सङ्घमज्झेsaṅ·gha·maj·jhe ठितकोवṭhi·ta·ko·va इमाi·mā गाथायोgā·thā·yo अभासि—a·bhā·si

     Kosambiyaṁ piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto senāsanaṁ saṁsāmetvā pattacīvaramādāya saṅghamajjhe ṭhitakova imā gāthāyo abhāsi—

     When he had completed his almsround, eaten his meal, and returned, he put his dwelling in order. He then took his bowl and robe, and while standing in the midst of the Sangha, he spoke these verses:

368. 368

     “पुथुसद्दोpu·thu·sad·do समजनो,sa·ma·ja·no

     “Puthusaddo samajano,

     “When many voices shout at once,

369. 369

     नna बालोbā·lo कोचिko·ci मञ्ञथ;mañ·ña·tha

     na bālo koci maññatha;

     No one thinks they are a fool.

370. 370

     सङ्घस्मिंsaṅ·ghas·miṃ भिज्जमानस्मिं,bhij·ja·mā·nas·miṃ

     Saṅghasmiṁ bhijjamānasmiṁ,

     Even as the Sangha splits,

371. 371

     नाञ्ञंnāñ·ñaṃ भिय्योbhiy·yo अमञ्ञरुं।a·mañ·ña·ruṃ

     nāññaṁ bhiyyo amaññaruṁ.

     They do not think it through.

372. 372

     परिमुट्ठाpa·ri·muṭ·ṭhā पण्डिताभासा,paṇ·ḍi·tā·bhā·sā

     Parimuṭṭhā paṇḍitābhāsā,

     Forgetting to speak wisely,

373. 373

     वाचागोचरभाणिनो;vā·cā·go·ca·ra·bhā·ṇi·no

     vācāgocarabhāṇino;

     They are obsessed by speech;

374. 374

     याविच्छन्तिyā·vic·chan·ti मुखायामं,mu·khā·yā·maṃ

     Yāvicchanti mukhāyāmaṁ,

     Saying whatever they like,

375. 375

     येनye·na नीताnī·tā नna तंtaṃ विदू।vi·dū

     yena nītā na taṁ vidū.

     They don’t know what leads them on.

376. 376

     अक्कोच्छिak·koc·chi मंmaṃ अवधिa·va·dhi मं,maṃ

     Akkocchi maṁ avadhi maṁ,

     ‘They abused me, they hit me,

377. 377

     अजिनिa·ji·ni मंmaṃ अहासिa·hā·si मे;me

     ajini maṁ ahāsi me;

     They defeated me, they robbed me.’

378. 378

     येye चca तंtaṃ उपनय्हन्ति,u·pa·nay·han·ti

     Ye ca taṁ upanayhanti,

     For those who carry on like this,

379. 379

     वेरंve·raṃ तेसंte·saṃ नna सम्मति।sam·ma·ti

     veraṁ tesaṁ na sammati.

     Hatred cannot end.

380. 380

     अक्कोच्छिak·koc·chi मंmaṃ अवधिa·va·dhi मं,maṃ

     Akkocchi maṁ avadhi maṁ,

     ‘They abused me, they hit me,

381. 381

     अजिनिa·ji·ni मंmaṃ अहासिa·hā·si मे;me

     ajini maṁ ahāsi me;

     They defeated me, they robbed me.’

382. 382

     येye चca तंtaṃ नुपनय्हन्ति,nu·pa·nay·han·ti

     Ye ca taṁ nupanayhanti,

     For those who do not carry on like this,

383. 383

     वेरंve·raṃ तेसूपसम्मति।te·sū·pa·sam·ma·ti

     veraṁ tesūpasammati.

     Hatred has an end.

384. 384

     नna हिhi वेरेनve·re·na वेरानि,ve·rā·ni

     Na hi verena verāni,

     For never does hatred

385. 385

     सम्मन्तीधsam·man·tī·dha कुदाचनं;ku·dā·ca·naṃ

     sammantīdha kudācanaṁ;

     End through hatred;

386. 386

     अवेरेनa·ve·re·na चca सम्मन्ति,sam·man·ti

     Averena ca sammanti,

     Only through love does it end—

387. 387

     एसधम्मोe·sa·dham·mo सनन्तनो।sa·nan·ta·no

     esadhammo sanantano.

     This is an ancient law.

388. 388

     परेpa·re चca नna विजानन्ति,vi·jā·nan·ti

     Pare ca na vijānanti,

     Others do not know

389. 389

     मयमेत्थma·ya·met·tha यमामसे;ya·mā·ma·se

     mayamettha yamāmase;

     That here we need restraint;

390. 390

     येye चca तत्थtat·tha विजानन्ति,vi·jā·nan·ti

     Ye ca tattha vijānanti,

     But there are those there who know,

391. 391

     ततोta·to सम्मन्तिsam·man·ti मेधगा।me·dha·gā

     tato sammanti medhagā.

     That quarrels end like this.

392. 392

     अट्ठिच्छिन्नाaṭ·ṭhic·chin·nā पाणहरा,pā·ṇa·ha·rā

     Aṭṭhicchinnā pāṇaharā,

     Those breaking bones and killing,

393. 393

     गवास्सधनहारिनो;ga·vās·sa·dha·na·hā·ri·no

     gavāssadhanahārino;

     Those taking cows, horses, and wealth,

394. 394

     रट्ठंraṭ·ṭhaṃ विलुम्पमानानं,vi·lum·pa·mā·nā·naṃ

     Raṭṭhaṁ vilumpamānānaṁ,

     Those plundering the country,

395. 395

     तेसम्पिte·sam·pi होतिho·ti सङ्गति।saṅ·ga·ti

     tesampi hoti saṅgati.

     Even they can stay together—

396. 396

     कस्माkas·mā तुम्हाकtum·hā·ka नोno सिया।si·yā

     Kasmā tumhāka no siyā.

     Why then cannot you?

397. 397

     सचेsa·ce लभेथla·bhe·tha निपकंni·pa·kaṃ सहायं,sa·hā·yaṃ

     Sace labhetha nipakaṁ sahāyaṁ,

     If you find a discerning friend,

398. 398

     सद्धिञ्चरंsad·dhiñ·ca·raṃ साधुविहारिsā·dhu·vi·hā·ri धीरं;dhī·raṃ

     Saddhiñcaraṁ sādhuvihāri dhīraṁ;

     A steadfast companion, good to live with,

399. 399

     अभिभुय्यa·bhi·bhuy·ya सब्बानिsab·bā·ni परिस्सयानि,pa·ris·sa·yā·ni

     Abhibhuyya sabbāni parissayāni,

     Then overcome all problems,

400. 400

     चरेय्यca·rey·ya तेनत्तमनोte·nat·ta·ma·no सतीमा।sa·tī·mā

     Careyya tenattamano satīmā.

     And go with them, glad and mindful.

401. 401

     नोno चेce लभेथla·bhe·tha निपकंni·pa·kaṃ सहायं,sa·hā·yaṃ

     No ce labhetha nipakaṁ sahāyaṁ,

     If you do not find a discerning friend,

402. 402

     सद्धिञ्चरंsad·dhiñ·ca·raṃ साधुविहारिsā·dhu·vi·hā·ri धीरं;dhī·raṃ

     Saddhiñcaraṁ sādhuvihāri dhīraṁ;

     A steadfast companion, good to live with,

403. 403

     राजावrā·jā·va रट्ठंraṭ·ṭhaṃ विजितंvi·ji·taṃ पहाय,pa·hā·ya

     Rājāva raṭṭhaṁ vijitaṁ pahāya,

     Then like a king giving up his kingdom,

404. 404

     एकोe·ko चरेca·re मातङ्गरञ्ञेवmā·taṅ·ga·rañ·ñe·va नागो।nā·go

     Eko care mātaṅgaraññeva nāgo.

     Wander alone like a mighty elephant in the forest.

405. 405

     एकस्सe·kas·sa चरितंca·ri·taṃ सेय्यो,sey·yo

     Ekassa caritaṁ seyyo,

     It’s better to wander alone,

406. 406

     नत्थिnat·thi बालेbā·le सहायता;sa·hā·ya·tā

     Natthi bāle sahāyatā;

     For there is no friendship with fools.

407. 407

     एकोe·ko चरेca·re नna चca पापानिpā·pā·ni कयिरा,ka·yi·rā

     Eko care na ca pāpāni kayirā,

     Wander alone and do no bad,

408. 408

     अप्पोस्सुक्कोap·pos·suk·ko मातङ्गरञ्ञेवmā·taṅ·ga·rañ·ñe·va नागो”ति।nā·go

     Appossukko mātaṅgaraññeva nāgo”ti.

     Unconcerned, like a mighty elephant in the forest.”

409. 409

     3। बालकलोणकगमनकथाbā·la·ka·lo·ṇa·ka·ga·ma·na·ka·thā

     3. Bālakaloṇakagamanakathā

     3. The account of going to Bālakaloṇaka

410. 410

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā सङ्घमज्झेsaṅ·gha·maj·jhe ठितकोवṭhi·ta·ko·va इमाi·mā गाथायोgā·thā·yo भासित्वाbhā·sit·vā येनye·na बालकलोणकगामोbā·la·ka·lo·ṇa·ka·gā·mo तेनुपसङ्कमि।te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi

     Atha kho bhagavā saṅghamajjhe ṭhitakova imā gāthāyo bhāsitvā yena bālakaloṇakagāmo tenupasaṅkami.

     After speaking these verses, the Buddha went to the village of Bālakaloṇaka.

411. 411

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na आयस्माā·yas·mā भगुbha·gu बालकलोणकगामेbā·la·ka·lo·ṇa·ka·gā·me विहरति।vi·ha·ra·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā bhagu bālakaloṇakagāme viharati.

     At that time Venerable Bhagu was staying near that village.

412. 412

     अद्दसाad·da·sā खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā भगुbha·gu भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ दूरतोवdū·ra·to·va आगच्छन्तं,ā·gac·chan·taṃ दिस्वानdis·vā·na आसनंā·sa·naṃ पञ्ञपेसि,pañ·ña·pe·si पादोदकंpā·do·da·kaṃ पादपीठंpā·da·pī·ṭhaṃ पादकथलिकंpā·da·ka·tha·li·kaṃ उपनिक्खिपि,u·pa·nik·khi·pi पच्चुग्गन्त्वाpac·cug·gan·tvā पत्तचीवरंpat·ta·cī·va·raṃ पटिग्गहेसि।pa·ṭig·ga·he·si

     Addasā kho āyasmā bhagu bhagavantaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ, disvāna āsanaṁ paññapesi, pādodakaṁ pādapīṭhaṁ pādakathalikaṁ upanikkhipi, paccuggantvā pattacīvaraṁ paṭiggahesi.

     When Bhagu saw the Buddha coming, he prepared a seat and set out a foot stool, a foot scraper, and water for washing the feet. He then went out to meet the Buddha, receiving his bowl and robe.

413. 413

     निसीदिni·sī·di भगवाbha·ga·vā पञ्ञत्तेpañ·ñat·te आसने,ā·sa·ne निसज्जni·saj·ja खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā पादेpā·de पक्खालेसि।pak·khā·le·si

     Nisīdi bhagavā paññatte āsane, nisajja kho bhagavā pāde pakkhālesi.

     The Buddha sat down on the prepared seat and washed his feet.

414. 414

     आयस्मापिā·yas·mā·pi खोkho भगुbha·gu भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

     Āyasmāpi kho bhagu bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

     When Bhagu had bowed and sat down,

415. 415

     एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नंni·sin·naṃ खोkho आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ भगुंbha·guṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho āyasmantaṁ bhaguṁ bhagavā etadavoca—

     the Buddha said to him,

416. 416

     “कच्चि,kac·ci भिक्खु,bhik·khu खमनीयं;kha·ma·nī·yaṃ

     “kacci, bhikkhu, khamanīyaṁ;

     “I hope you’re keeping well, monk,

417. 417

     कच्चिkac·ci यापनीयं,yā·pa·nī·yaṃ कच्चिkac·ci पिण्डकेनpiṇ·ḍa·ke·na नna किलमसी”ति?ki·la·ma·sī

     kacci yāpanīyaṁ, kacci piṇḍakena na kilamasī”ti?

     I hope you’re getting by? I hope you’re not having any trouble getting almsfood?”

418. 418

     “खमनीयं,kha·ma·nī·yaṃ भगवा,bha·ga·vā यापनीयं,yā·pa·nī·yaṃ भगवा;bha·ga·vā

     “Khamanīyaṁ, bhagavā, yāpanīyaṁ, bhagavā;

     “I’m keeping well, sir, I’m getting by.

419. 419

     नna चाहं,cā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te पिण्डकेनpiṇ·ḍa·ke·na किलमामी”ति।ki·la·mā·mī

     na cāhaṁ, bhante, piṇḍakena kilamāmī”ti.

     I’m having no trouble getting almsfood.”

420. 420

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ भगुंbha·guṃ धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सेत्वाsan·das·set·vā समादपेत्वाsa·mā·da·pet·vā समुत्तेजेत्वाsa·mut·te·jet·vā सम्पहंसेत्वाsam·pa·haṃ·set·vā उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā येनye·na पाचीनवंसदायोpā·cī·na·vaṃ·sa·dā·yo तेनुपसङ्कमि।te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi

     Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ bhaguṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā samādapetvā samuttejetvā sampahaṁsetvā uṭṭhāyāsanā yena pācīnavaṁsadāyo tenupasaṅkami.

     The Buddha instructed, inspired, and gladdened Bhagu with a teaching. He then got up from his seat and went to the Eastern Bamboo Park.

421. 421

     4। पाचीनवंसदायगमनकथाpā·cī·na·vaṃ·sa·dā·ya·ga·ma·na·ka·thā

     4. Pācīnavaṁsadāyagamanakathā

     4. The account of going to the Eastern Bamboo Park

422. 422

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na आयस्माā·yas·mā चca अनुरुद्धोa·nu·rud·dho आयस्माā·yas·mā चca नन्दियोnan·di·yo आयस्माā·yas·mā चca किमिलोki·mi·lo पाचीनवंसदायेpā·cī·na·vaṃ·sa·dā·ye विहरन्ति।vi·ha·ran·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā ca anuruddho āyasmā ca nandiyo āyasmā ca kimilo pācīnavaṁsadāye viharanti.

     At this time Venerable Anuruddha, Venerable Nandiya, and Venerable Kimila were staying at the Eastern Bamboo Park.

423. 423

     अद्दसाad·da·sā खोkho दायपालोdā·ya·pā·lo भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ दूरतोवdū·ra·to·va आगच्छन्तं,ā·gac·chan·taṃ दिस्वानdis·vā·na भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Addasā kho dāyapālo bhagavantaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ, disvāna bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     The park keeper saw the Buddha coming and said to him,

424. 424

     “मा,mā समण,sa·ma·ṇa एतंe·taṃ दायंdā·yaṃ पाविसि।pā·vi·si

     “mā, samaṇa, etaṁ dāyaṁ pāvisi.

     “Ascetic, don’t enter this park.

425. 425

     सन्तेत्थsan·tet·tha तयोta·yo कुलपुत्ताku·la·put·tā अत्तकामरूपाat·ta·kā·ma·rū·pā विहरन्ति।vi·ha·ran·ti

     Santettha tayo kulaputtā attakāmarūpā viharanti.

     There are three gentlemen here, practicing for their own good.

426. 426

     माmā तेसंte·saṃ अफासुमकासी”ति।a·phā·su·ma·kā·sī

     Mā tesaṁ aphāsumakāsī”ti.

     Please, don’t disturb them.”

427. 427

     अस्सोसिas·so·si खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā अनुरुद्धोa·nu·rud·dho दायपालस्सdā·ya·pā·las·sa भगवताbha·ga·va·tā सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ मन्तयमानस्स,man·ta·ya·mā·nas·sa सुत्वानsut·vā·na दायपालंdā·ya·pā·laṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Assosi kho āyasmā anuruddho dāyapālassa bhagavatā saddhiṁ mantayamānassa, sutvāna dāyapālaṁ etadavoca—

     When Anuruddha heard the park keeper advising the Buddha, he said,

428. 428

     “मावुसोmā·vu·so दायपाल,dā·ya·pā·la भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ वारेसि।vā·re·si

     “māvuso dāyapāla, bhagavantaṁ vāresi.

     “Please don’t block the Buddha.

429. 429

     सत्थाsat·thā नोno भगवाbha·ga·vā अनुप्पत्तो”ति।a·nup·pat·to

     Satthā no bhagavā anuppatto”ti.

     It’s our teacher who’s arrived.”

430. 430

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā अनुरुद्धोa·nu·rud·dho येनायस्माye·nā·yas·mā चca नन्दियोnan·di·yo आयस्माā·yas·mā चca किमिलोki·mi·lo तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā आयस्मन्तञ्चā·yas·man·tañ·ca नन्दियंnan·di·yaṃ आयस्मन्तञ्चā·yas·man·tañ·ca किमिलंki·mi·laṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho āyasmā anuruddho yenāyasmā ca nandiyo āyasmā ca kimilo tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantañca nandiyaṁ āyasmantañca kimilaṁ etadavoca—

     Anuruddha then went to Nandiya and Kimila and said,

431. 431

     “अभिक्कमथायस्मन्तोa·bhik·ka·ma·thā·yas·man·to अभिक्कमथायस्मन्तो,a·bhik·ka·ma·thā·yas·man·to सत्थाsat·thā नोno भगवाbha·ga·vā अनुप्पत्तो”ति।a·nup·pat·to

     “abhikkamathāyasmanto abhikkamathāyasmanto, satthā no bhagavā anuppatto”ti.

     “Come out, venerables, our teacher has arrived.”

432. 432

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā चca अनुरुद्धोa·nu·rud·dho आयस्माā·yas·mā चca नन्दियोnan·di·yo आयस्माā·yas·mā चca किमिलोki·mi·lo भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ पच्चुग्गन्त्वाpac·cug·gan·tvā एकोe·ko भगवतोbha·ga·va·to पत्तचीवरंpat·ta·cī·va·raṃ पटिग्गहेसि,pa·ṭig·ga·he·si एकोe·ko आसनंā·sa·naṃ पञ्ञपेसि,pañ·ña·pe·si एकोe·ko पादोदकंpā·do·da·kaṃ पादपीठंpā·da·pī·ṭhaṃ पादकथलिकंpā·da·ka·tha·li·kaṃ उपनिक्खिपि।u·pa·nik·khi·pi

     Atha kho āyasmā ca anuruddho āyasmā ca nandiyo āyasmā ca kimilo bhagavantaṁ paccuggantvā eko bhagavato pattacīvaraṁ paṭiggahesi, eko āsanaṁ paññapesi, eko pādodakaṁ pādapīṭhaṁ pādakathalikaṁ upanikkhipi.

     The three of them went out to meet the Buddha. One received his bowl and robe, one prepared a seat, and one put out a foot stool, a foot scraper, and water for washing the feet.

433. 433

     निसीदिni·sī·di भगवाbha·ga·vā पञ्ञत्तेpañ·ñat·te आसने,ā·sa·ne निसज्जni·saj·ja खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā पादेpā·de पक्खालेसि।pak·khā·le·si

     Nisīdi bhagavā paññatte āsane, nisajja kho bhagavā pāde pakkhālesi.

     The Buddha sat down on the prepared seat and washed his feet.

434. 434

     तेपिte·pi खोkho आयस्मन्तोā·yas·man·to भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदिंसु।ni·sī·diṃ·su

     Tepi kho āyasmanto bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.

     When they had bowed and sat down,

435. 435

     एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नंni·sin·naṃ खोkho आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ अनुरुद्धंa·nu·rud·dhaṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho āyasmantaṁ anuruddhaṁ bhagavā etadavoca—

     the Buddha said to them,

436. 436

     “कच्चिkac·ci वो,vo अनुरुद्धा,a·nu·rud·dhā खमनीयं,kha·ma·nī·yaṃ कच्चिkac·ci यापनीयं;yā·pa·nī·yaṃ

     “kacci vo, anuruddhā, khamanīyaṁ, kacci yāpanīyaṁ;

     “I hope you’re all keeping well, Anuruddha, I hope you’re getting by?

437. 437

     कच्चिkac·ci पिण्डकेनpiṇ·ḍa·ke·na नna किलमथा”ति?ki·la·ma·thā

     kacci piṇḍakena na kilamathā”ti?

     I hope you’re not having any trouble getting almsfood?”

438. 438

     “खमनीयं,kha·ma·nī·yaṃ भगवा,bha·ga·vā यापनीयं,yā·pa·nī·yaṃ भगवा;bha·ga·vā

     “Khamanīyaṁ, bhagavā, yāpanīyaṁ, bhagavā;

     “We’re keeping well, sir, we’re getting by.

439. 439

     नna चca मयं,ma·yaṃ भन्ते,bhan·te पिण्डकेनpiṇ·ḍa·ke·na किलमामा”ति।ki·la·mā·mā

     na ca mayaṁ, bhante, piṇḍakena kilamāmā”ti.

     We’re not having any trouble getting almsfood.”

440. 440

     “कच्चिkac·ci पनpa·na वो,vo अनुरुद्धा,a·nu·rud·dhā समग्गाsa·mag·gā सम्मोदमानाsam·mo·da·mā·nā अविवदमानाa·vi·va·da·mā·nā खीरोदकीभूताkhī·ro·da·kī·bhū·tā अञ्ञमञ्ञंañ·ña·mañ·ñaṃ पियचक्खूहिpi·ya·cak·khū·hi सम्पस्सन्ताsam·pas·san·tā विहरथा”ति?vi·ha·ra·thā

     “Kacci pana vo, anuruddhā, samaggā sammodamānā avivadamānā khīrodakībhūtā aññamaññaṁ piyacakkhūhi sampassantā viharathā”ti?

     “I hope you’re living together in peace and harmony, blending like milk and water, and regarding one another with affection?”

441. 441

     “तग्घtag·gha मयं,ma·yaṃ भन्ते,bhan·te समग्गाsa·mag·gā सम्मोदमानाsam·mo·da·mā·nā अविवदमानाa·vi·va·da·mā·nā खीरोदकीभूताkhī·ro·da·kī·bhū·tā अञ्ञमञ्ञंañ·ña·mañ·ñaṃ पियचक्खूहिpi·ya·cak·khū·hi सम्पस्सन्ताsam·pas·san·tā विहरामा”ति।vi·ha·rā·mā

     “Taggha mayaṁ, bhante, samaggā sammodamānā avivadamānā khīrodakībhūtā aññamaññaṁ piyacakkhūhi sampassantā viharāmā”ti.

     “Yes, we are.”

442. 442

     “यथाya·thā कथंka·thaṃ पनpa·na तुम्हे,tum·he अनुरुद्धा,a·nu·rud·dhā समग्गाsa·mag·gā सम्मोदमानाsam·mo·da·mā·nā अविवदमानाa·vi·va·da·mā·nā खीरोदकीभूताkhī·ro·da·kī·bhū·tā अञ्ञमञ्ञंañ·ña·mañ·ñaṃ पियचक्खूहिpi·ya·cak·khū·hi सम्पस्सन्ताsam·pas·san·tā विहरथा”ति?vi·ha·ra·thā

     “Yathā kathaṁ pana tumhe, anuruddhā, samaggā sammodamānā avivadamānā khīrodakībhūtā aññamaññaṁ piyacakkhūhi sampassantā viharathā”ti?

     “And how do you do this?”

443. 443

     “इधi·dha मय्हं,may·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te एवंe·vaṃ होति—ho·ti

     “Idha mayhaṁ, bhante, evaṁ hoti—

     “I think like this:

444. 444

     ‘लाभाlā·bhā वतva·ta मे,me सुलद्धंsu·lad·dhaṃ वतva·ta मे,me योहंyo·haṃ एवरूपेहिe·va·rū·pe·hi सब्रह्मचारीहिsab·rah·ma·cā·rī·hi सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ विहरामी’ति।vi·ha·rā·mī

     ‘lābhā vata me, suladdhaṁ vata me, yohaṁ evarūpehi sabrahmacārīhi saddhiṁ viharāmī’ti.

     ‘How fortunate I am to be living with such fellow monastics!’

445. 445

     तस्सtas·sa मय्हं,may·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te इमेसुi·me·su आयस्मन्तेसुā·yas·man·te·su मेत्तंmet·taṃ कायकम्मंkā·ya·kam·maṃ पच्चुपट्ठितंpac·cu·paṭ·ṭhi·taṃ आविā·vi चेवce·va रहोra·ho च;ca

     Tassa mayhaṁ, bhante, imesu āyasmantesu mettaṁ kāyakammaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ āvi ceva raho ca;

     And I do acts of good will toward them by body,

446. 446

     मेत्तंmet·taṃ वचीकम्मंva·cī·kam·maṃ …

     mettaṁ vacīkammaṁ …

     speech,

447. 447

     मेत्तंmet·taṃ मनोकम्मंma·no·kam·maṃ पच्चुपट्ठितंpac·cu·paṭ·ṭhi·taṃ आविā·vi चेवce·va रहोra·ho च।ca

     mettaṁ manokammaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ āvi ceva raho ca.

     and mind, both in public and in private.

448. 448

     तस्सtas·sa मय्हं,may·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te एवंe·vaṃ होति—ho·ti

     Tassa mayhaṁ, bhante, evaṁ hoti—

     I think,

449. 449

     ‘यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ सकंsa·kaṃ चित्तंcit·taṃ निक्खिपित्वाnik·khi·pit·vā इमेसंयेवi·me·saṃ·ye·va आयस्मन्तानंā·yas·man·tā·naṃ चित्तस्सcit·tas·sa वसेनva·se·na वत्तेय्यन्’ति।vat·tey·yan

     ‘yannūnāhaṁ sakaṁ cittaṁ nikkhipitvā imesaṁyeva āyasmantānaṁ cittassa vasena vatteyyan’ti.

     ‘Why don’t I set aside what I wish to do and instead do what these venerables wish?’

450. 450

     सोso खोkho अहं,a·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te सकंsa·kaṃ चित्तंcit·taṃ निक्खिपित्वाnik·khi·pit·vā इमेसंयेवi·me·saṃ·ye·va आयस्मन्तानंā·yas·man·tā·naṃ चित्तस्सcit·tas·sa वसेनva·se·na वत्तामि।vat·tā·mi

     So kho ahaṁ, bhante, sakaṁ cittaṁ nikkhipitvā imesaṁyeva āyasmantānaṁ cittassa vasena vattāmi.

     And that’s what I do.

451. 451

     नानाnā·nā हिhi खोkho नो,no भन्ते,bhan·te काया,kā·yā एकञ्चe·kañ·ca पनpa·na मञ्ञेmañ·ñe चित्तन्”ति।cit·tan

     Nānā hi kho no, bhante, kāyā, ekañca pana maññe cittan”ti.

     We’re separate in body, but it might seem as if we’re one in mind.”

452. 452

     आयस्मापिā·yas·mā·pi खोkho नन्दियोnan·di·yo …पे…pe

     Āyasmāpi kho nandiyo …pe…

     Nandiya and Kimila then repeated what Anuruddha had said.

453. 453

     आयस्मापिā·yas·mā·pi खोkho किमिलोki·mi·lo भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     āyasmāpi kho kimilo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     (Pāli only)

454. 454

     “मय्हम्पिmay·ham·pi खो,kho भन्ते,bhan·te एवंe·vaṃ होति—ho·ti

     “mayhampi kho, bhante, evaṁ hoti—

     (Pāli only)

455. 455

     ‘लाभाlā·bhā वतva·ta मे,me सुलद्धंsu·lad·dhaṃ वतva·ta मे,me योहंyo·haṃ एवरूपेहिe·va·rū·pe·hi सब्रह्मचारीहिsab·rah·ma·cā·rī·hi सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ विहरामी’ति।vi·ha·rā·mī

     ‘lābhā vata me, suladdhaṁ vata me, yohaṁ evarūpehi sabrahmacārīhi saddhiṁ viharāmī’ti.

     (Pāli only)

456. 456

     तस्सtas·sa मय्हं,may·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te इमेसुi·me·su आयस्मन्तेसुā·yas·man·te·su मेत्तंmet·taṃ कायकम्मंkā·ya·kam·maṃ पच्चुपट्ठितंpac·cu·paṭ·ṭhi·taṃ आविā·vi चेवce·va रहोra·ho च;ca

     Tassa mayhaṁ, bhante, imesu āyasmantesu mettaṁ kāyakammaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ āvi ceva raho ca;

     (Pāli only)

457. 457

     मेत्तंmet·taṃ वचीकम्मंva·cī·kam·maṃ मेत्तंmet·taṃ मनोकम्मंma·no·kam·maṃ पच्चुपट्ठितंpac·cu·paṭ·ṭhi·taṃ आविā·vi चेवce·va रहोra·ho च।ca

     mettaṁ vacīkammaṁ mettaṁ manokammaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ āvi ceva raho ca.

     (Pāli only)

458. 458

     तस्सtas·sa मय्हं,may·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te एवंe·vaṃ होति—ho·ti

     Tassa mayhaṁ, bhante, evaṁ hoti—

     (Pāli only)

459. 459

     ‘यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ सकंsa·kaṃ चित्तंcit·taṃ निक्खिपित्वाnik·khi·pit·vā इमेसंयेवi·me·saṃ·ye·va आयस्मन्तानंā·yas·man·tā·naṃ चित्तस्सcit·tas·sa वसेनva·se·na वत्तेय्यन्’ति।vat·tey·yan

     ‘yannūnāhaṁ sakaṁ cittaṁ nikkhipitvā imesaṁyeva āyasmantānaṁ cittassa vasena vatteyyan’ti.

     (Pāli only)

460. 460

     सोso खोkho अहं,a·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te सकंsa·kaṃ चित्तंcit·taṃ निक्खिपित्वाnik·khi·pit·vā इमेसंयेवi·me·saṃ·ye·va आयस्मन्तानंā·yas·man·tā·naṃ चित्तस्सcit·tas·sa वसेनva·se·na वत्तामि।vat·tā·mi

     So kho ahaṁ, bhante, sakaṁ cittaṁ nikkhipitvā imesaṁyeva āyasmantānaṁ cittassa vasena vattāmi.

     (Pāli only)

461. 461

     नानाnā·nā हिhi खोkho नो,no भन्ते,bhan·te काया,kā·yā एकञ्चe·kañ·ca पनpa·na मञ्ञेmañ·ñe चित्तन्ति।cit·tan·ti

     Nānā hi kho no, bhante, kāyā, ekañca pana maññe cittanti.

     (Pāli only)

462. 462

     एवंe·vaṃ खोkho मयं,ma·yaṃ भन्ते,bhan·te समग्गाsa·mag·gā सम्मोदमानाsam·mo·da·mā·nā अविवदमानाa·vi·va·da·mā·nā खीरोदकीभूताkhī·ro·da·kī·bhū·tā अञ्ञमञ्ञंañ·ña·mañ·ñaṃ पियचक्खूहिpi·ya·cak·khū·hi सम्पस्सन्ताsam·pas·san·tā विहरामा”ति।vi·ha·rā·mā

     Evaṁ kho mayaṁ, bhante, samaggā sammodamānā avivadamānā khīrodakībhūtā aññamaññaṁ piyacakkhūhi sampassantā viharāmā”ti.

     (Pāli only)

463. 463

     “कच्चिkac·ci पनpa·na वो,vo अनुरुद्धा,a·nu·rud·dhā अप्पमत्ताap·pa·mat·tā आतापिनोā·tā·pi·no पहितत्ताpa·hi·tat·tā विहरथा”ति?vi·ha·ra·thā

     “Kacci pana vo, anuruddhā, appamattā ātāpino pahitattā viharathā”ti?

     “I hope, Anuruddha, that you’re heedful and energetic?”

464. 464

     “तग्घtag·gha मयं,ma·yaṃ भन्ते,bhan·te अप्पमत्ताap·pa·mat·tā आतापिनोā·tā·pi·no पहितत्ताpa·hi·tat·tā विहरामा”ति।vi·ha·rā·mā

     “Taggha mayaṁ, bhante, appamattā ātāpino pahitattā viharāmā”ti.

     “Yes, sir, we are.”

465. 465

     “यथाya·thā कथंka·thaṃ पनpa·na तुम्हे,tum·he अनुरुद्धा,a·nu·rud·dhā अप्पमत्ताap·pa·mat·tā आतापिनोā·tā·pi·no पहितत्ताpa·hi·tat·tā विहरथा”ति?vi·ha·ra·thā

     “Yathā kathaṁ pana tumhe, anuruddhā, appamattā ātāpino pahitattā viharathā”ti?

     “And how is it that you’re heedful and energetic?”

466. 466

     “इध,i·dha भन्ते,bhan·te अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ योyo पठमंpa·ṭha·maṃ गामतोgā·ma·to पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya पटिक्कमतिpa·ṭik·ka·ma·ti सोso आसनंā·sa·naṃ पञ्ञपेति,pañ·ña·pe·ti पादोदकंpā·do·da·kaṃ पादपीठंpā·da·pī·ṭhaṃ पादकथलिकंpā·da·ka·tha·li·kaṃ उपनिक्खिपति,u·pa·nik·khi·pa·ti अवक्कारपातिंa·vak·kā·ra·pā·tiṃ धोवित्वाdho·vit·vā उपट्ठापेति,u·paṭ·ṭhā·pe·ti पानीयंpā·nī·yaṃ परिभोजनीयंpa·ri·bho·ja·nī·yaṃ उपट्ठापेति।u·paṭ·ṭhā·pe·ti

     “Idha, bhante, amhākaṁ yo paṭhamaṁ gāmato piṇḍāya paṭikkamati so āsanaṁ paññapeti, pādodakaṁ pādapīṭhaṁ pādakathalikaṁ upanikkhipati, avakkārapātiṁ dhovitvā upaṭṭhāpeti, pānīyaṁ paribhojanīyaṁ upaṭṭhāpeti.

     “Whoever returns first from almsround in the village, he prepares the seats and sets out a foot stool, a foot scraper, and water for washing the feet. He washes the bowl for leftovers and puts it back out, and sets out water for drinking and water for washing.

467. 467

     योyo पच्छाpac·chā गामतोgā·ma·to पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya पटिक्कमति,pa·ṭik·ka·ma·ti सचेsa·ce होतिho·ti भुत्तावसेसो,bhut·tā·va·se·so सचेsa·ce आकङ्खतिā·kaṅ·kha·ti भुञ्जति,bhuñ·ja·ti नोno चेce आकङ्खतिā·kaṅ·kha·ti अप्पहरितेap·pa·ha·ri·te वाvā छड्डेति।chaḍ·ḍe·ti

     Yo pacchā gāmato piṇḍāya paṭikkamati, sace hoti bhuttāvaseso, sace ākaṅkhati bhuñjati, no ce ākaṅkhati appaharite vā chaḍḍeti.

     Whoever returns last from almsround may eat the leftovers, or he discards them where there are no cultivated plants

468. 468

     अप्पाणकेap·pā·ṇa·ke वाvā उदकेu·da·ke ओपिलापेति।o·pi·lā·pe·ti

     Appāṇake vā udake opilāpeti.

     or in water without life.

469. 469

     सोso आसनंā·sa·naṃ उद्धरति,ud·dha·ra·ti पादोदकंpā·do·da·kaṃ पादपीठंpā·da·pī·ṭhaṃ पादकथलिकंpā·da·ka·tha·li·kaṃ पटिसामेति,pa·ṭi·sā·me·ti अवक्कारपातिंa·vak·kā·ra·pā·tiṃ धोवित्वाdho·vit·vā पटिसामेति,pa·ṭi·sā·me·ti पानीयंpā·nī·yaṃ परिभोजनीयंpa·ri·bho·ja·nī·yaṃ पटिसामेति,pa·ṭi·sā·me·ti भत्तग्गंbhat·tag·gaṃ सम्मज्जति।sam·maj·ja·ti

     So āsanaṁ uddharati, pādodakaṁ pādapīṭhaṁ pādakathalikaṁ paṭisāmeti, avakkārapātiṁ dhovitvā paṭisāmeti, pānīyaṁ paribhojanīyaṁ paṭisāmeti, bhattaggaṁ sammajjati.

     He puts away the seats and also the foot stool, the foot scraper, and the water for washing the feet. He washes the bowl for leftovers and puts it away, puts away the water for drinking and the water for washing, and sweeps the dining hall.

470. 470

     योyo पस्सतिpas·sa·ti पानीयघटंpā·nī·ya·gha·ṭaṃ वाvā परिभोजनीयघटंpa·ri·bho·ja·nī·ya·gha·ṭaṃ वाvā वच्चघटंvac·ca·gha·ṭaṃ वाvā रित्तंrit·taṃ तुच्छंtuc·chaṃ सोso उपट्ठापेति।u·paṭ·ṭhā·pe·ti

     Yo passati pānīyaghaṭaṁ vā paribhojanīyaghaṭaṁ vā vaccaghaṭaṁ vā rittaṁ tucchaṁ so upaṭṭhāpeti.

     Whoever sees that the pot for drinking water, the pot for washing water, or the waterpot in the restroom is empty fills it.

471. 471

     सचस्सsa·cas·sa होतिho·ti अविसय्हं,a·vi·say·haṃ हत्थविकारेनhat·tha·vi·kā·re·na दुतियंdu·ti·yaṃ आमन्तेत्वाā·man·tet·vā हत्थविलङ्घकेनhat·tha·vi·laṅ·gha·ke·na उपट्ठापेम,u·paṭ·ṭhā·pe·ma नna त्वेवtve·va मयं,ma·yaṃ भन्ते,bhan·te तप्पच्चयाtap·pac·ca·yā वाचंvā·caṃ भिन्दाम।bhin·dā·ma

     Sacassa hoti avisayhaṁ, hatthavikārena dutiyaṁ āmantetvā hatthavilaṅghakena upaṭṭhāpema, na tveva mayaṁ, bhante, tappaccayā vācaṁ bhindāma.

     If he can’t do it by himself, he calls someone over by hand signal, and they move it together. We don’t speak because of that.

472. 472

     पञ्चाहिकंpañ·cā·hi·kaṃ खोkho पनpa·na मयं,ma·yaṃ भन्ते,bhan·te सब्बरत्तिंsab·ba·rat·tiṃ धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्निसीदाम।san·ni·sī·dā·ma

     Pañcāhikaṁ kho pana mayaṁ, bhante, sabbarattiṁ dhammiyā kathāya sannisīdāma.

     And every five days we sit together the whole night to discuss the Teaching.”

473. 473

     एवंe·vaṃ खोkho मयं,ma·yaṃ भन्ते,bhan·te अप्पमत्ताap·pa·mat·tā आतापिनोā·tā·pi·no पहितत्ताpa·hi·tat·tā विहरामा”ति।vi·ha·rā·mā

     Evaṁ kho mayaṁ, bhante, appamattā ātāpino pahitattā viharāmā”ti.

     (Pāli only)

474. 474

     5। पालिलेय्यकगमनकथाpā·li·ley·ya·ka·ga·ma·na·ka·thā

     5. Pālileyyakagamanakathā

     5. The account of going to Pālileyyaka

475. 475

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā आयस्मन्तञ्चā·yas·man·tañ·ca अनुरुद्धंa·nu·rud·dhaṃ आयस्मन्तञ्चā·yas·man·tañ·ca नन्दियंnan·di·yaṃ आयस्मन्तञ्चā·yas·man·tañ·ca किमिलंki·mi·laṃ धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सेत्वाsan·das·set·vā समादपेत्वाsa·mā·da·pet·vā समुत्तेजेत्वाsa·mut·te·jet·vā सम्पहंसेत्वाsam·pa·haṃ·set·vā उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā येनye·na पालिलेय्यकंpā·li·ley·ya·kaṃ तेनte·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

     Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantañca anuruddhaṁ āyasmantañca nandiyaṁ āyasmantañca kimilaṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā samādapetvā samuttejetvā sampahaṁsetvā uṭṭhāyāsanā yena pālileyyakaṁ tena cārikaṁ pakkāmi.

     The Buddha then instructed, inspired, and gladdened Venerable Anuruddha, Venerable Nandiya, and Venerable Kimila with a teaching. He then got up from his seat and set out wandering toward Pālileyyaka.

476. 476

     अनुपुब्बेनa·nu·pub·be·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ चरमानोca·ra·mā·no येनye·na पालिलेय्यकंpā·li·ley·ya·kaṃ तदवसरि।ta·da·va·sa·ri

     Anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena pālileyyakaṁ tadavasari.

     When he eventually arrived,

477. 477

     तत्रtat·ra सुदंsu·daṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā पालिलेय्यकेpā·li·ley·ya·ke विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti रक्खितवनसण्डेrak·khi·ta·va·na·saṇ·ḍe भद्दसालमूले।bhad·da·sā·la·mū·le

     Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā pālileyyake viharati rakkhitavanasaṇḍe bhaddasālamūle.

     he stayed in a protected forest grove, at the foot of an auspicious sal tree.

478. 478

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवतोbha·ga·va·to रहोगतस्सra·ho·ga·tas·sa पटिसल्लीनस्सpa·ṭi·sal·lī·nas·sa एवंe·vaṃ चेतसोce·ta·so परिवितक्कोpa·ri·vi·tak·ko उदपादि—u·da·pā·di

     Atha kho bhagavato rahogatassa paṭisallīnassa evaṁ cetaso parivitakko udapādi—

     Then, while he was reflecting in private, the Buddha thought,

479. 479

     “अहंa·haṃ खोkho पुब्बेpub·be आकिण्णोā·kiṇ·ṇo नna फासुphā·su विहासिंvi·hā·siṃ तेहिte·hi कोसम्बकेहिko·sam·ba·ke·hi भिक्खूहिbhik·khū·hi भण्डनकारकेहिbhaṇ·ḍa·na·kā·ra·ke·hi कलहकारकेहिka·la·ha·kā·ra·ke·hi विवादकारकेहिvi·vā·da·kā·ra·ke·hi भस्सकारकेहिbhas·sa·kā·ra·ke·hi सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe अधिकरणकारकेहि।a·dhi·ka·ra·ṇa·kā·ra·ke·hi

     “ahaṁ kho pubbe ākiṇṇo na phāsu vihāsiṁ tehi kosambakehi bhikkhūhi bhaṇḍanakārakehi kalahakārakehi vivādakārakehi bhassakārakehi saṅghe adhikaraṇakārakehi.

     “Previously, when I was surrounded by those quarreling monks at Kosambī, I wasn’t at ease.

480. 480

     सोम्हिsom·hi एतरहिe·ta·ra·hi एकोe·ko अदुतियोa·du·ti·yo सुखंsu·khaṃ फासुphā·su विहरामिvi·ha·rā·mi अञ्ञत्रेवañ·ñat·re·va तेहिte·hi कोसम्बकेहिko·sam·ba·ke·hi भिक्खूहिbhik·khū·hi भण्डनकारकेहिbhaṇ·ḍa·na·kā·ra·ke·hi कलहकारकेहिka·la·ha·kā·ra·ke·hi विवादकारकेहिvi·vā·da·kā·ra·ke·hi भस्सकारकेहिbhas·sa·kā·ra·ke·hi सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe अधिकरणकारकेही”ति।a·dhi·ka·ra·ṇa·kā·ra·ke·hī

     Somhi etarahi eko adutiyo sukhaṁ phāsu viharāmi aññatreva tehi kosambakehi bhikkhūhi bhaṇḍanakārakehi kalahakārakehi vivādakārakehi bhassakārakehi saṅghe adhikaraṇakārakehī”ti.

     But now that I’m alone, away from those monks, I’m happy and at ease.”

481. 481

     अञ्ञतरोपिañ·ña·ta·ro·pi खोkho हत्थिनागोhat·thi·nā·go आकिण्णोā·kiṇ·ṇo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti हत्थीहिhat·thī·hi हत्थिनीहिhat·thi·nī·hi हत्थिकळभेहिhat·thi·ka·ḷa·bhe·hi हत्थिच्छापेहि,hat·thic·chā·pe·hi छिन्नग्गानिchin·nag·gā·ni चेवce·va तिणानिti·ṇā·ni खादति,khā·da·ti ओभग्गोभग्गञ्चस्सo·bhag·go·bhag·gañ·cas·sa साखाभङ्गंsā·khā·bhaṅ·gaṃ खादन्ति,khā·dan·ti आविलानिā·vi·lā·ni चca पानीयानिpā·nī·yā·ni पिवति,pi·va·ti ओगाहाo·gā·hā चस्सcas·sa ओतिण्णस्सo·tiṇ·ṇas·sa हत्थिनियोhat·thi·ni·yo कायंkā·yaṃ उपनिघंसन्तियोu·pa·ni·ghaṃ·san·ti·yo गच्छन्ति।gac·chan·ti

     Aññataropi kho hatthināgo ākiṇṇo viharati hatthīhi hatthinīhi hatthikaḷabhehi hatthicchāpehi, chinnaggāni ceva tiṇāni khādati, obhaggobhaggañcassa sākhābhaṅgaṁ khādanti, āvilāni ca pānīyāni pivati, ogāhā cassa otiṇṇassa hatthiniyo kāyaṁ upanighaṁsantiyo gacchanti.

     At that time there was a large bull elephant who lived surrounded by a herd—by males and females, by juveniles and babies. He ate grass with the tips broken off and drank muddy water. Other elephants ate the branches that he had pulled down. And when he was immersed in a pool, the female elephants came rubbing their bodies against his.

482. 482

     अथa·tha खोkho तस्सtas·sa हत्थिनागस्सhat·thi·nā·gas·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     Atha kho tassa hatthināgassa etadahosi—

     He considered this and thought,

483. 483

     “अहंa·haṃ खोkho आकिण्णोā·kiṇ·ṇo विहरामिvi·ha·rā·mi हत्थीहिhat·thī·hi हत्थिनीहिhat·thi·nī·hi हत्थिकळभेहिhat·thi·ka·ḷa·bhe·hi हत्थिच्छापेहि,hat·thic·chā·pe·hi छिन्नग्गानिchin·nag·gā·ni चेवce·va तिणानिti·ṇā·ni खादामि,khā·dā·mi ओभग्गोभग्गञ्चo·bhag·go·bhag·gañ·ca मेme साखाभङ्गंsā·khā·bhaṅ·gaṃ खादन्ति,khā·dan·ti आविलानिā·vi·lā·ni चca पानीयानिpā·nī·yā·ni पिवामि,pi·vā·mi ओगाहाo·gā·hā चca मेme ओतिण्णस्सo·tiṇ·ṇas·sa हत्थिनियोhat·thi·ni·yo कायंkā·yaṃ उपनिघंसन्तियोu·pa·ni·ghaṃ·san·ti·yo गच्छन्ति।gac·chan·ti

     “ahaṁ kho ākiṇṇo viharāmi hatthīhi hatthinīhi hatthikaḷabhehi hatthicchāpehi, chinnaggāni ceva tiṇāni khādāmi, obhaggobhaggañca me sākhābhaṅgaṁ khādanti, āvilāni ca pānīyāni pivāmi, ogāhā ca me otiṇṇassa hatthiniyo kāyaṁ upanighaṁsantiyo gacchanti.

     (Pāli only)

484. 484

     यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ एकोवe·ko·va गणस्माga·ṇas·mā वूपकट्ठोvū·pa·kaṭ·ṭho विहरेय्यन्”ति।vi·ha·rey·yan

     Yannūnāhaṁ ekova gaṇasmā vūpakaṭṭho vihareyyan”ti.

     “Why don’t I leave the herd and stay by myself?”

485. 485

     अथa·tha खोkho सोso हत्थिनागोhat·thi·nā·go यूथाyū·thā अपक्कम्मa·pak·kam·ma येनye·na पालिलेय्यकंpā·li·ley·ya·kaṃ रक्खितवनसण्डोrak·khi·ta·va·na·saṇ·ḍo भद्दसालमूलंbhad·da·sā·la·mū·laṃ येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā सोण्डायsoṇ·ḍā·ya भगवतोbha·ga·va·to पानीयंpā·nī·yaṃ परिभोजनीयंpa·ri·bho·ja·nī·yaṃ उपट्ठापेति,u·paṭ·ṭhā·pe·ti अप्पहरितञ्चap·pa·ha·ri·tañ·ca करोति।ka·ro·ti

     Atha kho so hatthināgo yūthā apakkamma yena pālileyyakaṁ rakkhitavanasaṇḍo bhaddasālamūlaṁ yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā soṇḍāya bhagavato pānīyaṁ paribhojanīyaṁ upaṭṭhāpeti, appaharitañca karoti.

     He then left the herd and went to Pālileyyaka, to where the Buddha was at the foot of the auspicious sal tree. And he attended on the Buddha, using his trunk to set out water for drinking and water for washing, and to clear the vegetation.

486. 486

     अथa·tha खोkho तस्सtas·sa हत्थिनागस्सhat·thi·nā·gas·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     Atha kho tassa hatthināgassa etadahosi—

     He thought,

487. 487

     “अहंa·haṃ खोkho पुब्बेpub·be आकिण्णोā·kiṇ·ṇo नna फासुphā·su विहासिंvi·hā·siṃ हत्थीहिhat·thī·hi हत्थिनीहिhat·thi·nī·hi हत्थिकळभेहिhat·thi·ka·ḷa·bhe·hi हत्थिच्छापेहि,hat·thic·chā·pe·hi छिन्नग्गानिchin·nag·gā·ni चेवce·va तिणानिti·ṇā·ni खादिं,khā·diṃ ओभग्गोभग्गञ्चo·bhag·go·bhag·gañ·ca मेme साखाभङ्गंsā·khā·bhaṅ·gaṃ खादिंसु,khā·diṃ·su आविलानिā·vi·lā·ni चca पानीयानिpā·nī·yā·ni अपायिंa·pā·yiṃ ओगाहाo·gā·hā चca मेme ओतिण्णस्सo·tiṇ·ṇas·sa हत्थिनियोhat·thi·ni·yo कायंkā·yaṃ उपनिघंसन्तियोu·pa·ni·ghaṃ·san·ti·yo अगमंसु।a·ga·maṃ·su

     “ahaṁ kho pubbe ākiṇṇo na phāsu vihāsiṁ hatthīhi hatthinīhi hatthikaḷabhehi hatthicchāpehi, chinnaggāni ceva tiṇāni khādiṁ, obhaggobhaggañca me sākhābhaṅgaṁ khādiṁsu, āvilāni ca pānīyāni apāyiṁ ogāhā ca me otiṇṇassa hatthiniyo kāyaṁ upanighaṁsantiyo agamaṁsu.

     “Previously, when I was surrounded by the other elephants, I wasn’t at ease.

488. 488

     सोम्हिsom·hi एतरहिe·ta·ra·hi एकोe·ko अदुतियोa·du·ti·yo सुखंsu·khaṃ फासुphā·su विहरामिvi·ha·rā·mi अञ्ञत्रेवañ·ñat·re·va हत्थीहिhat·thī·hi हत्थिनीहिhat·thi·nī·hi हत्थिकळभेहिhat·thi·ka·ḷa·bhe·hi हत्थिच्छापेही”ति।hat·thic·chā·pe·hī

     Somhi etarahi eko adutiyo sukhaṁ phāsu viharāmi aññatreva hatthīhi hatthinīhi hatthikaḷabhehi hatthicchāpehī”ti.

     But now that I’m alone, away from those elephants, I’m happy and at ease.”

489. 489

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā अत्तनोat·ta·no चca पविवेकंpa·vi·ve·kaṃ विदित्वाvi·dit·vā तस्सtas·sa चca हत्थिनागस्सhat·thi·nā·gas·sa चेतसाce·ta·sā चेतोपरिवितक्कमञ्ञायce·to·pa·ri·vi·tak·ka·mañ·ñā·ya तायंtā·yaṃ वेलायंve·lā·yaṃ इमंi·maṃ उदानंu·dā·naṃ उदानेसि—u·dā·ne·si

     Atha kho bhagavā attano ca pavivekaṁ viditvā tassa ca hatthināgassa cetasā cetoparivitakkamaññāya tāyaṁ velāyaṁ imaṁ udānaṁ udānesi—

     After considering his own seclusion and reading the mind of the elephant, the Buddha uttered a heartfelt exclamation:

490. 490

     “एतंe·taṃ नागस्सnā·gas·sa नागेन,nā·ge·na

     “Etaṁ nāgassa nāgena,

     “The mind of this mighty elephant,

491. 491

     ईसादन्तस्सī·sā·dan·tas·sa हत्थिनो;hat·thi·no

     īsādantassa hatthino;

     With tusks like chariot poles,

492. 492

     समेतिsa·me·ti चित्तंcit·taṃ चित्तेन,cit·te·na

     Sameti cittaṁ cittena,

     Agrees with the mind of the Sage,

493. 493

     यदेकोya·de·ko रमतीra·ma·tī वने”ति।va·ne

     yadeko ramatī vane”ti.

     Since they each delight in the forest solitude.”

494. 494

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā पालिलेय्यकेpā·li·ley·ya·ke यथाभिरन्तंya·thā·bhi·ran·taṃ विहरित्वाvi·ha·rit·vā येनye·na सावत्थिsā·vat·thi तेनte·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

     Atha kho bhagavā pālileyyake yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā yena sāvatthi tena cārikaṁ pakkāmi.

     When the Buddha had stayed at Pālileyyaka for as long as he liked, he set out wandering toward Sāvatthī.

495. 495

     अनुपुब्बेनa·nu·pub·be·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ चरमानोca·ra·mā·no येनye·na सावत्थिsā·vat·thi तदवसरि।ta·da·va·sa·ri

     Anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena sāvatthi tadavasari.

     When he eventually arrived,

496. 496

     तत्रtat·ra सुदंsu·daṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā सावत्थियंsā·vat·thi·yaṃ विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti जेतवनेje·ta·va·ne अनाथपिण्डिकस्सa·nā·tha·piṇ·ḍi·kas·sa आरामे।ā·rā·me

     Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.

     he stayed in the Jeta Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s Monastery.

497. 497

     अथa·tha खोkho कोसम्बकाko·sam·ba·kā उपासका—u·pā·sa·kā

     Atha kho kosambakā upāsakā—

     Soon the lay followers in Kosambī considered,

498. 498

     “इमेi·me खोkho अय्याay·yā कोसम्बकाko·sam·ba·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū बहुनोba·hu·no अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ अनत्थस्सa·nat·thas·sa कारका।kā·ra·kā

     “ime kho ayyā kosambakā bhikkhū bahuno amhākaṁ anatthassa kārakā.

     “These venerable monks at Kosambī have caused us much misfortune.

499. 499

     इमेहिi·me·hi उब्बाळ्होub·bā·ḷho भगवाbha·ga·vā पक्कन्तो।pak·kan·to

     Imehi ubbāḷho bhagavā pakkanto.

     The Buddha himself left because he was troubled by them.

500. 500

     हन्दhan·da मयंma·yaṃ अय्येay·ye कोसम्बकेko·sam·ba·ke भिक्खूbhik·khū नेवne·va अभिवादेय्याम,a·bhi·vā·dey·yā·ma नna पच्चुट्ठेय्याम,pac·cuṭ·ṭhey·yā·ma नna अञ्जलिकम्मंañ·ja·li·kam·maṃ सामीचिकम्मंsā·mī·ci·kam·maṃ करेय्याम,ka·rey·yā·ma नna सक्करेय्याम,sak·ka·rey·yā·ma नna गरुंga·ruṃ करेय्याम,ka·rey·yā·ma नna मानेय्याम,mā·ney·yā·ma नna भजेय्याम,bha·jey·yā·ma नna पूजेय्याम,pū·jey·yā·ma उपगतानम्पिu·pa·ga·tā·nam·pi पिण्डकंpiṇ·ḍa·kaṃ नna दज्जेय्याम—daj·jey·yā·ma

     Handa mayaṁ ayye kosambake bhikkhū neva abhivādeyyāma, na paccuṭṭheyyāma, na añjalikammaṁ sāmīcikammaṁ kareyyāma, na sakkareyyāma, na garuṁ kareyyāma, na māneyyāma, na bhajeyyāma, na pūjeyyāma, upagatānampi piṇḍakaṁ na dajjeyyāma—

     Well then, let’s not bow down, rise up, raise our joined palms, or do acts of respect toward them. And let’s not honor, respect, esteem, or associate with them, nor give them almsfood.

501. 501

     एवंe·vaṃ इमेi·me अम्हेहिam·he·hi असक्करियमानाa·sak·ka·ri·ya·mā·nā अगरुकरियमानाa·ga·ru·ka·ri·ya·mā·nā अमानियमानाa·mā·ni·ya·mā·nā अभजियमानाa·bha·ji·ya·mā·nā अपूजियमानाa·pū·ji·ya·mā·nā असक्कारपकताa·sak·kā·ra·pa·ka·tā पक्कमिस्सन्तिpak·ka·mis·san·ti वाvā विब्भमिस्सन्तिvib·bha·mis·san·ti वाvā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ वाvā पसादेस्सन्ती”ति।pa·sā·des·san·tī

     evaṁ ime amhehi asakkariyamānā agarukariyamānā amāniyamānā abhajiyamānā apūjiyamānā asakkārapakatā pakkamissanti vā vibbhamissanti vā bhagavantaṁ vā pasādessantī”ti.

     Then, they’ll either leave, disrobe, or reconcile with the Buddha.”

502. 502

     अथa·tha खोkho कोसम्बकाko·sam·ba·kā उपासकाu·pā·sa·kā कोसम्बकेko·sam·ba·ke भिक्खूbhik·khū नेवne·va अभिवादेसुं,a·bhi·vā·de·suṃ नna पच्चुट्ठेसुं,pac·cuṭ·ṭhe·suṃ नna अञ्जलिकम्मंañ·ja·li·kam·maṃ सामीचिकम्मंsā·mī·ci·kam·maṃ अकंसु,a·kaṃ·su नna सक्करिंसु,sak·ka·riṃ·su नna गरुंga·ruṃ करिंसु,ka·riṃ·su नna मानेसुं,mā·ne·suṃ नna भजेसुं,bha·je·suṃ नna पूजेसुं,pū·je·suṃ उपगतानम्पिu·pa·ga·tā·nam·pi पिण्डकंpiṇ·ḍa·kaṃ नna अदंसु।a·daṃ·su

     Atha kho kosambakā upāsakā kosambake bhikkhū neva abhivādesuṁ, na paccuṭṭhesuṁ, na añjalikammaṁ sāmīcikammaṁ akaṁsu, na sakkariṁsu, na garuṁ kariṁsu, na mānesuṁ, na bhajesuṁ, na pūjesuṁ, upagatānampi piṇḍakaṁ na adaṁsu.

     And they did just that.

503. 503

     अथa·tha खोkho कोसम्बकाko·sam·ba·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū कोसम्बकेहिko·sam·ba·ke·hi उपासकेहिu·pā·sa·ke·hi असक्करियमानाa·sak·ka·ri·ya·mā·nā अगरुकरियमानाa·ga·ru·ka·ri·ya·mā·nā अमानियमानाa·mā·ni·ya·mā·nā अभजियमानाa·bha·ji·ya·mā·nā अपूजियमानाa·pū·ji·ya·mā·nā असक्कारपकताa·sak·kā·ra·pa·ka·tā एवमाहंसु—e·va·mā·haṃ·su

     Atha kho kosambakā bhikkhū kosambakehi upāsakehi asakkariyamānā agarukariyamānā amāniyamānā abhajiyamānā apūjiyamānā asakkārapakatā evamāhaṁsu—

     Soon the monks at Kosambī said,

504. 504

     “हन्दhan·da मयं,ma·yaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so सावत्थिंsā·vat·thiṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke इमंi·maṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसमेय्यामा”ति।vū·pa·sa·mey·yā·mā

     “handa mayaṁ, āvuso, sāvatthiṁ gantvā bhagavato santike imaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasameyyāmā”ti.

     “Well then, let’s go to Sāvatthī and resolve this legal issue in the presence of the Buddha.”

505. 505

     6। अट्ठारसवत्थुकथाaṭ·ṭhā·ra·sa·vat·thu·ka·thā

     6. Aṭṭhārasavatthukathā

     6. The account of the eighteen grounds

506. 506

     अथa·tha खोkho कोसम्बकाko·sam·ba·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ संसामेत्वाsaṃ·sā·met·vā पत्तचीवरमादायpat·ta·cī·va·ra·mā·dā·ya येनye·na सावत्थिsā·vat·thi तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु।te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su

     Atha kho kosambakā bhikkhū senāsanaṁ saṁsāmetvā pattacīvaramādāya yena sāvatthi tenupasaṅkamiṁsu.

     The monks at Kosambī put their dwellings in order, took their bowls and robes, and went to Sāvatthī.

507. 507

     अस्सोसिas·so·si खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā सारिपुत्तो—sā·ri·put·to

     Assosi kho āyasmā sāriputto—

     When Venerable Sāriputta heard

508. 508

     “तेte किरki·ra कोसम्बकाko·sam·ba·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū भण्डनकारकाbhaṇ·ḍa·na·kā·ra·kā कलहकारकाka·la·ha·kā·ra·kā विवादकारकाvi·vā·da·kā·ra·kā भस्सकारकाbhas·sa·kā·ra·kā सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe अधिकरणकारकाa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇa·kā·ra·kā सावत्थिंsā·vat·thiṃ आगच्छन्ती”ति।ā·gac·chan·tī

     “te kira kosambakā bhikkhū bhaṇḍanakārakā kalahakārakā vivādakārakā bhassakārakā saṅghe adhikaraṇakārakā sāvatthiṁ āgacchantī”ti.

     that they were coming,

509. 509

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā सारिपुत्तोsā·ri·put·to येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

     Atha kho āyasmā sāriputto yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

     he went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down,

510. 510

     एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नोni·sin·no खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā सारिपुत्तोsā·ri·put·to भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā sāriputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     and told him,

511. 511

     “तेte किर,ki·ra भन्ते,bhan·te कोसम्बकाko·sam·ba·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū भण्डनकारकाbhaṇ·ḍa·na·kā·ra·kā कलहकारकाka·la·ha·kā·ra·kā विवादकारकाvi·vā·da·kā·ra·kā भस्सकारकाbhas·sa·kā·ra·kā सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe अधिकरणकारकाa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇa·kā·ra·kā सावत्थिंsā·vat·thiṃ आगच्छन्ति।ā·gac·chan·ti

     “te kira, bhante, kosambakā bhikkhū bhaṇḍanakārakā kalahakārakā vivādakārakā bhassakārakā saṅghe adhikaraṇakārakā sāvatthiṁ āgacchanti.

     (Pāli only)

512. 512

     कथाहं,ka·thā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te तेसुte·su भिक्खूसुbhik·khū·su पटिपज्जामी”ति?pa·ṭi·paj·jā·mī

     Kathāhaṁ, bhante, tesu bhikkhūsu paṭipajjāmī”ti?

     adding, “Sir, how should I act toward these monks?”

513. 513

     “तेनte·na हिhi त्वं,tvaṃ सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta यथाya·thā धम्मोdham·mo तथाta·thā तिट्ठाही”ति।tiṭ·ṭhā·hī

     “Tena hi tvaṁ, sāriputta, yathā dhammo tathā tiṭṭhāhī”ti.

     “Take your stand in accordance with the Teaching.”

514. 514

     “कथाहं,ka·thā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te जानेय्यंjā·ney·yaṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ वाvā अधम्मंa·dham·maṃ वा”ति?vā

     “Kathāhaṁ, bhante, jāneyyaṁ dhammaṁ vā adhammaṁ vā”ti?

     “And how do I know what accords with the Teaching and what doesn’t?”

515. 515

     “अट्ठारसहिaṭ·ṭhā·ra·sa·hi खो,kho सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta वत्थूहिvat·thū·hi अधम्मवादीa·dham·ma·vā·dī जानितब्बो।jā·ni·tab·bo

     “Aṭṭhārasahi kho, sāriputta, vatthūhi adhammavādī jānitabbo.

     “There are eighteen grounds for knowing that someone is speaking contrary to the Teaching:

516. 516

     इध,i·dha सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta भिक्खुbhik·khu अधम्मंa·dham·maṃ धम्मोतिdham·mo·ti दीपेति,dī·pe·ti

     Idha, sāriputta, bhikkhu adhammaṁ dhammoti dīpeti,

     A monk proclaims what’s contrary to the Teaching as being in accordance with it,

517. 517

     धम्मंdham·maṃ अधम्मोतिa·dham·mo·ti दीपेति;dī·pe·ti

     dhammaṁ adhammoti dīpeti;

     and what’s in accordance with the Teaching as contrary to it.

518. 518

     अविनयंa·vi·na·yaṃ विनयोतिvi·na·yo·ti दीपेति,dī·pe·ti

     avinayaṁ vinayoti dīpeti,

     He proclaims what’s contrary to the Monastic Law as being in accordance with it,

519. 519

     विनयंvi·na·yaṃ अविनयोतिa·vi·na·yo·ti दीपेति;dī·pe·ti

     vinayaṁ avinayoti dīpeti;

     and what’s in accordance with the Monastic Law as contrary to it.

520. 520

     अभासितंa·bhā·si·taṃ अलपितंa·la·pi·taṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na भासितंbhā·si·taṃ लपितंla·pi·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेति,dī·pe·ti

     abhāsitaṁ alapitaṁ tathāgatena bhāsitaṁ lapitaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpeti,

     He proclaims what hasn’t been spoken by the Buddha as spoken by him,

521. 521

     भासितंbhā·si·taṃ लपितंla·pi·taṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na अभासितंa·bhā·si·taṃ अलपितंa·la·pi·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेति;dī·pe·ti

     bhāsitaṁ lapitaṁ tathāgatena abhāsitaṁ alapitaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpeti;

     and what’s been spoken by the Buddha as not spoken by him.

522. 522

     अनाचिण्णंa·nā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na आचिण्णंā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेति,dī·pe·ti

     anāciṇṇaṁ tathāgatena āciṇṇaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpeti,

     He proclaims what wasn’t practiced by the Buddha as practiced by him,

523. 523

     आचिण्णंā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na अनाचिण्णंa·nā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेति;dī·pe·ti

     āciṇṇaṁ tathāgatena anāciṇṇaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpeti;

     and what was practiced by the Buddha as not practiced by him.

524. 524

     अपञ्ञत्तंa·pañ·ñat·taṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na पञ्ञत्तंpañ·ñat·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेति,dī·pe·ti

     apaññattaṁ tathāgatena paññattaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpeti,

     He proclaims what wasn’t laid down by the Buddha as laid down by him,

525. 525

     पञ्ञत्तंpañ·ñat·taṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na अपञ्ञत्तंa·pañ·ñat·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेति;dī·pe·ti

     paññattaṁ tathāgatena apaññattaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpeti;

     and what was laid down by the Buddha as not laid down by him.

526. 526

     अनापत्तिंa·nā·pat·tiṃ आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेति,dī·pe·ti

     anāpattiṁ āpattīti dīpeti,

     He proclaims a non-offense as an offense,

527. 527

     आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ अनापत्तीतिa·nā·pat·tī·ti दीपेति;dī·pe·ti

     āpattiṁ anāpattīti dīpeti;

     and an offense as a non-offense.

528. 528

     लहुकंla·hu·kaṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ गरुकाga·ru·kā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेति,dī·pe·ti

     lahukaṁ āpattiṁ garukā āpattīti dīpeti,

     He proclaims a light offense as heavy,

529. 529

     गरुकंga·ru·kaṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ लहुकाla·hu·kā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेति;dī·pe·ti

     garukaṁ āpattiṁ lahukā āpattīti dīpeti;

     and a heavy offense as light.

530. 530

     सावसेसंsā·va·se·saṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ अनवसेसाa·na·va·se·sā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेति,dī·pe·ti

     sāvasesaṁ āpattiṁ anavasesā āpattīti dīpeti,

     He proclaims a curable offense as incurable,

531. 531

     अनवसेसंa·na·va·se·saṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ सावसेसाsā·va·se·sā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेति;dī·pe·ti

     anavasesaṁ āpattiṁ sāvasesā āpattīti dīpeti;

     and an incurable offense as curable.

532. 532

     दुट्ठुल्लंduṭ·ṭhul·laṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ अदुट्ठुल्लाa·duṭ·ṭhul·lā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेति,dī·pe·ti

     duṭṭhullaṁ āpattiṁ aduṭṭhullā āpattīti dīpeti,

     He proclaims a grave offense as minor,

533. 533

     अदुट्ठुल्लंa·duṭ·ṭhul·laṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ दुट्ठुल्लाduṭ·ṭhul·lā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेति—dī·pe·ti

     aduṭṭhullaṁ āpattiṁ duṭṭhullā āpattīti dīpeti—

     and a minor offense as grave.

534. 534

     इमेहिi·me·hi खो,kho सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta अट्ठारसहिaṭ·ṭhā·ra·sa·hi वत्थूहिvat·thū·hi अधम्मवादीa·dham·ma·vā·dī जानितब्बो।jā·ni·tab·bo

     imehi kho, sāriputta, aṭṭhārasahi vatthūhi adhammavādī jānitabbo.

     (Pāli only)

535. 535

     अट्ठारसहिaṭ·ṭhā·ra·sa·hi चca खो,kho सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta वत्थूहिvat·thū·hi धम्मवादीdham·ma·vā·dī जानितब्बो।jā·ni·tab·bo

     Aṭṭhārasahi ca kho, sāriputta, vatthūhi dhammavādī jānitabbo.

     And there are eighteen grounds for knowing that someone is speaking in accordance with the Teaching:

536. 536

     इध,i·dha सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta भिक्खुbhik·khu अधम्मंa·dham·maṃ अधम्मोतिa·dham·mo·ti दीपेति,dī·pe·ti

     Idha, sāriputta, bhikkhu adhammaṁ adhammoti dīpeti,

     A monk proclaims what’s contrary to the Teaching as such,

537. 537

     धम्मंdham·maṃ धम्मोतिdham·mo·ti दीपेति;dī·pe·ti

     dhammaṁ dhammoti dīpeti;

     and what’s in accordance with the Teaching as such.

538. 538

     अविनयंa·vi·na·yaṃ अविनयोतिa·vi·na·yo·ti दीपेति,dī·pe·ti

     avinayaṁ avinayoti dīpeti,

     He proclaims what’s contrary to the Monastic Law as such,

539. 539

     विनयंvi·na·yaṃ विनयोतिvi·na·yo·ti दीपेति;dī·pe·ti

     vinayaṁ vinayoti dīpeti;

     and what’s in accordance with the Monastic Law as such.

540. 540

     अभासितंa·bhā·si·taṃ अलपितंa·la·pi·taṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na अभासितंa·bhā·si·taṃ अलपितंa·la·pi·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेति,dī·pe·ti

     abhāsitaṁ alapitaṁ tathāgatena abhāsitaṁ alapitaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpeti,

     He proclaims what hasn’t been spoken by the Buddha as such,

541. 541

     भासितंbhā·si·taṃ लपितंla·pi·taṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na भासितंbhā·si·taṃ लपितंla·pi·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेति;dī·pe·ti

     bhāsitaṁ lapitaṁ tathāgatena bhāsitaṁ lapitaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpeti;

     and what’s been spoken by the Buddha as such.

542. 542

     अनाचिण्णंa·nā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na अनाचिण्णंa·nā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेति,dī·pe·ti

     anāciṇṇaṁ tathāgatena anāciṇṇaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpeti,

     He proclaims what wasn’t practiced by the Buddha as such,

543. 543

     आचिण्णंā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na आचिण्णंā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेति;dī·pe·ti

     āciṇṇaṁ tathāgatena āciṇṇaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpeti;

     and what was practiced by the Buddha as such.

544. 544

     अपञ्ञत्तंa·pañ·ñat·taṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na अपञ्ञत्तंa·pañ·ñat·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेति,dī·pe·ti

     apaññattaṁ tathāgatena apaññattaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpeti,

     He proclaims what wasn’t laid down by the Buddha as such,

545. 545

     पञ्ञत्तंpañ·ñat·taṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na पञ्ञत्तंpañ·ñat·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेति;dī·pe·ti

     paññattaṁ tathāgatena paññattaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpeti;

     and what was laid down by the Buddha as such.

546. 546

     अनापत्तिंa·nā·pat·tiṃ अनापत्तीतिa·nā·pat·tī·ti दीपेति,dī·pe·ti

     anāpattiṁ anāpattīti dīpeti,

     He proclaims a non-offense as such,

547. 547

     आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेति;dī·pe·ti

     āpattiṁ āpattīti dīpeti;

     and an offense as such.

548. 548

     लहुकंla·hu·kaṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ लहुकाla·hu·kā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेति,dī·pe·ti

     lahukaṁ āpattiṁ lahukā āpattīti dīpeti,

     He proclaims a light offense as light,

549. 549

     गरुकंga·ru·kaṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ गरुकाga·ru·kā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेति;dī·pe·ti

     garukaṁ āpattiṁ garukā āpattīti dīpeti;

     and a heavy offense as heavy.

550. 550

     सावसेसंsā·va·se·saṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ सावसेसाsā·va·se·sā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेति,dī·pe·ti

     sāvasesaṁ āpattiṁ sāvasesā āpattīti dīpeti,

     He proclaims a curable offense as curable,

551. 551

     अनवसेसंa·na·va·se·saṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ अनवसेसाa·na·va·se·sā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेति;dī·pe·ti

     anavasesaṁ āpattiṁ anavasesā āpattīti dīpeti;

     and an incurable offense as incurable.

552. 552

     दुट्ठुल्लंduṭ·ṭhul·laṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ दुट्ठुल्लाduṭ·ṭhul·lā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेति,dī·pe·ti

     duṭṭhullaṁ āpattiṁ duṭṭhullā āpattīti dīpeti,

     He proclaims a grave offense as grave,

553. 553

     अदुट्ठुल्लंa·duṭ·ṭhul·laṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ अदुट्ठुल्लाa·duṭ·ṭhul·lā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेति—dī·pe·ti

     aduṭṭhullaṁ āpattiṁ aduṭṭhullā āpattīti dīpeti—

     and a minor offense as minor.”

554. 554

     इमेहिi·me·hi खो,kho सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta अट्ठारसहिaṭ·ṭhā·ra·sa·hi वत्थूहिvat·thū·hi धम्मवादीdham·ma·vā·dī जानितब्बो”ति।jā·ni·tab·bo

     imehi kho, sāriputta, aṭṭhārasahi vatthūhi dhammavādī jānitabbo”ti.

     (Pāli only)

555. 555

     अस्सोसिas·so·si खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā महामोग्गल्लानोma·hā·mog·gal·lā·no …पे…pe

     Assosi kho āyasmā mahāmoggallāno …pe…

     When Venerable Mahāmoggallāna heard …

556. 556

     अस्सोसिas·so·si खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā महाकस्सपोma·hā·kas·sa·po …

     assosi kho āyasmā mahākassapo …

     When Venerable Mahākassapa heard …

557. 557

     अस्सोसिas·so·si खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā महाकच्चानोma·hā·kac·cā·no …

     assosi kho āyasmā mahākaccāno …

     When Venerable Mahākaccāna heard …

558. 558

     अस्सोसिas·so·si खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā महाकोट्ठिकोma·hā·koṭ·ṭhi·ko …

     assosi kho āyasmā mahākoṭṭhiko …

     When Venerable Mahākoṭṭhika heard …

559. 559

     अस्सोसिas·so·si खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā महाकप्पिनोma·hā·kap·pi·no …

     assosi kho āyasmā mahākappino …

     When Venerable Mahākappina heard …

560. 560

     अस्सोसिas·so·si खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā महाचुन्दोma·hā·cun·do …

     assosi kho āyasmā mahācundo …

     When Venerable Mahācunda heard …

561. 561

     अस्सोसिas·so·si खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā अनुरुद्धोa·nu·rud·dho …

     assosi kho āyasmā anuruddho …

     When Venerable Anuruddha heard …

562. 562

     अस्सोसिas·so·si खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā रेवतोre·va·to …

     assosi kho āyasmā revato …

     When Venerable Revata heard …

563. 563

     अस्सोसिas·so·si खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā उपालिu·pā·li …

     assosi kho āyasmā upāli …

     When Venerable Upāli heard …

564. 564

     अस्सोसिas·so·si खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā आनन्दोā·nan·do …

     assosi kho āyasmā ānando …

     When Venerable Ānanda heard …

565. 565

     अस्सोसिas·so·si खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā राहुलो—rā·hu·lo

     assosi kho āyasmā rāhulo—

     When Venerable Rāhula heard

566. 566

     “तेte किरki·ra कोसम्बकाko·sam·ba·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū भण्डनकारकाbhaṇ·ḍa·na·kā·ra·kā कलहकारकाka·la·ha·kā·ra·kā विवादकारकाvi·vā·da·kā·ra·kā भस्सकारकाbhas·sa·kā·ra·kā सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe अधिकरणकारकाa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇa·kā·ra·kā सावत्थिंsā·vat·thiṃ आगच्छन्ती”ति।ā·gac·chan·tī

     “te kira kosambakā bhikkhū bhaṇḍanakārakā kalahakārakā vivādakārakā bhassakārakā saṅghe adhikaraṇakārakā sāvatthiṁ āgacchantī”ti.

     that they were coming,

567. 567

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā राहुलोrā·hu·lo येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

     Atha kho āyasmā rāhulo yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

     he too went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down,

568. 568

     एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नोni·sin·no खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā राहुलोrā·hu·lo भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā rāhulo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     and told him,

569. 569

     “तेte किर,ki·ra भन्ते,bhan·te कोसम्बकाko·sam·ba·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū भण्डनकारकाbhaṇ·ḍa·na·kā·ra·kā कलहकारकाka·la·ha·kā·ra·kā विवादकारकाvi·vā·da·kā·ra·kā भस्सकारकाbhas·sa·kā·ra·kā सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe अधिकरणकारकाa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇa·kā·ra·kā सावत्थिंsā·vat·thiṃ आगच्छन्ति।ā·gac·chan·ti

     “te kira, bhante, kosambakā bhikkhū bhaṇḍanakārakā kalahakārakā vivādakārakā bhassakārakā saṅghe adhikaraṇakārakā sāvatthiṁ āgacchanti.

     (Pāli only)

570. 570

     कथाहं,ka·thā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te तेसुte·su भिक्खूसुbhik·khū·su पटिपज्जामी”ति?pa·ṭi·paj·jā·mī

     Kathāhaṁ, bhante, tesu bhikkhūsu paṭipajjāmī”ti?

     adding, “Sir, how should I act toward these monks?”

571. 571

     “तेनte·na हिhi त्वं,tvaṃ राहुल,rā·hu·la यथाya·thā धम्मोdham·mo तथाta·thā तिट्ठाही”ति।tiṭ·ṭhā·hī

     “Tena hi tvaṁ, rāhula, yathā dhammo tathā tiṭṭhāhī”ti.

     “Take your stand in accordance with the Teaching.”

572. 572

     “कथाहं,ka·thā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te जानेय्यंjā·ney·yaṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ वाvā अधम्मंa·dham·maṃ वा”ति?vā

     “Kathāhaṁ, bhante, jāneyyaṁ dhammaṁ vā adhammaṁ vā”ti?

     “And how do I know what accords with the Teaching and what doesn’t?”

573. 573

     “अट्ठारसहिaṭ·ṭhā·ra·sa·hi खो,kho राहुल,rā·hu·la वत्थूहिvat·thū·hi अधम्मवादीa·dham·ma·vā·dī जानितब्बो।jā·ni·tab·bo

     “Aṭṭhārasahi kho, rāhula, vatthūhi adhammavādī jānitabbo.

     The Buddha told him, too, about the eighteen grounds for knowing that someone is speaking contrary to the Teaching

574. 574

     इध,i·dha राहुल,rā·hu·la भिक्खुbhik·khu अधम्मंa·dham·maṃ धम्मोतिdham·mo·ti दीपेति,dī·pe·ti धम्मंdham·maṃ अधम्मोतिa·dham·mo·ti दीपेति;dī·pe·ti

     Idha, rāhula, bhikkhu adhammaṁ dhammoti dīpeti, dhammaṁ adhammoti dīpeti;

     and the eighteen grounds for knowing that someone is speaking in accordance with the Teaching.

575. 575

     अविनयंa·vi·na·yaṃ विनयोतिvi·na·yo·ti दीपेति,dī·pe·ti विनयंvi·na·yaṃ अविनयोतिa·vi·na·yo·ti दीपेति;dī·pe·ti

     avinayaṁ vinayoti dīpeti, vinayaṁ avinayoti dīpeti;

     (Pāli only)

576. 576

     अभासितंa·bhā·si·taṃ अलपितंa·la·pi·taṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na भासितंbhā·si·taṃ लपितंla·pi·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेति,dī·pe·ti भासितंbhā·si·taṃ लपितंla·pi·taṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na अभासितंa·bhā·si·taṃ अलपितंa·la·pi·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेति;dī·pe·ti

     abhāsitaṁ alapitaṁ tathāgatena bhāsitaṁ lapitaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpeti, bhāsitaṁ lapitaṁ tathāgatena abhāsitaṁ alapitaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpeti;

     (Pāli only)

577. 577

     अनाचिण्णंa·nā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na आचिण्णंā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेति,dī·pe·ti आचिण्णंā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na अनाचिण्णंa·nā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेति;dī·pe·ti

     anāciṇṇaṁ tathāgatena āciṇṇaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpeti, āciṇṇaṁ tathāgatena anāciṇṇaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpeti;

     (Pāli only)

578. 578

     अपञ्ञत्तंa·pañ·ñat·taṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na पञ्ञत्तंpañ·ñat·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेति,dī·pe·ti पञ्ञत्तंpañ·ñat·taṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na अपञ्ञत्तंa·pañ·ñat·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेति;dī·pe·ti

     apaññattaṁ tathāgatena paññattaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpeti, paññattaṁ tathāgatena apaññattaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpeti;

     (Pāli only)

579. 579

     अनापत्तिंa·nā·pat·tiṃ आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेति,dī·pe·ti आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ अनापत्तीतिa·nā·pat·tī·ti दीपेति;dī·pe·ti

     anāpattiṁ āpattīti dīpeti, āpattiṁ anāpattīti dīpeti;

     (Pāli only)

580. 580

     लहुकंla·hu·kaṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ गरुकाga·ru·kā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेति,dī·pe·ti गरुकंga·ru·kaṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ लहुकाla·hu·kā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेति;dī·pe·ti

     lahukaṁ āpattiṁ garukā āpattīti dīpeti, garukaṁ āpattiṁ lahukā āpattīti dīpeti;

     (Pāli only)

581. 581

     सावसेसंsā·va·se·saṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ अनवसेसाa·na·va·se·sā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेति,dī·pe·ti अनवसेसंa·na·va·se·saṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ सावसेसाsā·va·se·sā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेति;dī·pe·ti

     sāvasesaṁ āpattiṁ anavasesā āpattīti dīpeti, anavasesaṁ āpattiṁ sāvasesā āpattīti dīpeti;

     (Pāli only)

582. 582

     दुट्ठुल्लंduṭ·ṭhul·laṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ अदुट्ठुल्लाa·duṭ·ṭhul·lā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेति,dī·pe·ti अदुट्ठुल्लंa·duṭ·ṭhul·laṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ दुट्ठुल्लाduṭ·ṭhul·lā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेति—dī·pe·ti

     duṭṭhullaṁ āpattiṁ aduṭṭhullā āpattīti dīpeti, aduṭṭhullaṁ āpattiṁ duṭṭhullā āpattīti dīpeti—

     (Pāli only)

583. 583

     इमेहिi·me·hi खो,kho राहुल,rā·hu·la अट्ठारसहिaṭ·ṭhā·ra·sa·hi वत्थूहिvat·thū·hi अधम्मवादीa·dham·ma·vā·dī जानितब्बो।jā·ni·tab·bo

     imehi kho, rāhula, aṭṭhārasahi vatthūhi adhammavādī jānitabbo.

     (Pāli only)

584. 584

     अट्ठारसहिaṭ·ṭhā·ra·sa·hi चca खो,kho राहुल,rā·hu·la वत्थूहिvat·thū·hi धम्मवादीdham·ma·vā·dī जानितब्बो।jā·ni·tab·bo

     Aṭṭhārasahi ca kho, rāhula, vatthūhi dhammavādī jānitabbo.

     (Pāli only)

585. 585

     इध,i·dha राहुल,rā·hu·la भिक्खुbhik·khu अधम्मंa·dham·maṃ अधम्मोतिa·dham·mo·ti दीपेति,dī·pe·ti धम्मंdham·maṃ धम्मोतिdham·mo·ti दीपेति;dī·pe·ti

     Idha, rāhula, bhikkhu adhammaṁ adhammoti dīpeti, dhammaṁ dhammoti dīpeti;

     (Pāli only)

586. 586

     अविनयंa·vi·na·yaṃ अविनयोतिa·vi·na·yo·ti दीपेति,dī·pe·ti विनयंvi·na·yaṃ विनयोतिvi·na·yo·ti दीपेति;dī·pe·ti

     avinayaṁ avinayoti dīpeti, vinayaṁ vinayoti dīpeti;

     (Pāli only)

587. 587

     अभासितंa·bhā·si·taṃ अलपितंa·la·pi·taṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na अभासितंa·bhā·si·taṃ अलपितंa·la·pi·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेति,dī·pe·ti भासितंbhā·si·taṃ लपितंla·pi·taṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na भासितंbhā·si·taṃ लपितंla·pi·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेति;dī·pe·ti

     abhāsitaṁ alapitaṁ tathāgatena abhāsitaṁ alapitaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpeti, bhāsitaṁ lapitaṁ tathāgatena bhāsitaṁ lapitaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpeti;

     (Pāli only)

588. 588

     अनाचिण्णंa·nā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na अनाचिण्णंa·nā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेति,dī·pe·ti आचिण्णंā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na आचिण्णंā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेति;dī·pe·ti

     anāciṇṇaṁ tathāgatena anāciṇṇaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpeti, āciṇṇaṁ tathāgatena āciṇṇaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpeti;

     (Pāli only)

589. 589

     अपञ्ञत्तंa·pañ·ñat·taṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na अपञ्ञत्तंa·pañ·ñat·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेति,dī·pe·ti पञ्ञत्तंpañ·ñat·taṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na पञ्ञत्तंpañ·ñat·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेति;dī·pe·ti

     apaññattaṁ tathāgatena apaññattaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpeti, paññattaṁ tathāgatena paññattaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpeti;

     (Pāli only)

590. 590

     अनापत्तिंa·nā·pat·tiṃ अनापत्तीतिa·nā·pat·tī·ti दीपेति,dī·pe·ti आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेति;dī·pe·ti

     anāpattiṁ anāpattīti dīpeti, āpattiṁ āpattīti dīpeti;

     (Pāli only)

591. 591

     लहुकंla·hu·kaṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ लहुकाla·hu·kā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेति,dī·pe·ti गरुकंga·ru·kaṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ गरुकाga·ru·kā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेति;dī·pe·ti

     lahukaṁ āpattiṁ lahukā āpattīti dīpeti, garukaṁ āpattiṁ garukā āpattīti dīpeti;

     (Pāli only)

592. 592

     सावसेसंsā·va·se·saṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ सावसेसाsā·va·se·sā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेति,dī·pe·ti अनवसेसंa·na·va·se·saṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ अनवसेसाa·na·va·se·sā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेति;dī·pe·ti

     sāvasesaṁ āpattiṁ sāvasesā āpattīti dīpeti, anavasesaṁ āpattiṁ anavasesā āpattīti dīpeti;

     (Pāli only)

593. 593

     दुट्ठुल्लंduṭ·ṭhul·laṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ दुट्ठुल्लाduṭ·ṭhul·lā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेति,dī·pe·ti अदुट्ठुल्लंa·duṭ·ṭhul·laṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ अदुट्ठुल्लाa·duṭ·ṭhul·lā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेति—dī·pe·ti

     duṭṭhullaṁ āpattiṁ duṭṭhullā āpattīti dīpeti, aduṭṭhullaṁ āpattiṁ aduṭṭhullā āpattīti dīpeti—

     (Pāli only)

594. 594

     इमेहिi·me·hi खो,kho राहुल,rā·hu·la अट्ठारसहिaṭ·ṭhā·ra·sa·hi वत्थूहिvat·thū·hi धम्मवादीdham·ma·vā·dī जानितब्बो”ति।jā·ni·tab·bo

     imehi kho, rāhula, aṭṭhārasahi vatthūhi dhammavādī jānitabbo”ti.

     (Pāli only)

595. 595

     अस्सोसिas·so·si खोkho महापजापतिma·hā·pa·jā·pa·ti गोतमी—go·ta·mī

     Assosi kho mahāpajāpati gotamī—

     When Mahāpajāpati Gotamī heard

596. 596

     “तेte किरki·ra कोसम्बकाko·sam·ba·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū भण्डनकारकाbhaṇ·ḍa·na·kā·ra·kā कलहकारकाka·la·ha·kā·ra·kā विवादकारकाvi·vā·da·kā·ra·kā भस्सकारकाbhas·sa·kā·ra·kā सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe अधिकरणकारकाa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇa·kā·ra·kā सावत्थिंsā·vat·thiṃ आगच्छन्ती”ति।ā·gac·chan·tī

     “te kira kosambakā bhikkhū bhaṇḍanakārakā kalahakārakā vivādakārakā bhassakārakā saṅghe adhikaraṇakārakā sāvatthiṁ āgacchantī”ti.

     that they were coming,

597. 597

     अथa·tha खोkho महापजापतिma·hā·pa·jā·pa·ti गोतमीgo·ta·mī येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ अट्ठासि।aṭ·ṭhā·si

     Atha kho mahāpajāpati gotamī yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi.

     she too went to the Buddha, bowed,

598. 598

     एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ ठिताṭhi·tā खोkho महापजापतिma·hā·pa·jā·pa·ti गोतमीgo·ta·mī भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Ekamantaṁ ṭhitā kho mahāpajāpati gotamī bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     and told him,

599. 599

     “तेte किर,ki·ra भन्ते,bhan·te कोसम्बकाko·sam·ba·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū भण्डनकारकाbhaṇ·ḍa·na·kā·ra·kā कलहकारकाka·la·ha·kā·ra·kā विवादकारकाvi·vā·da·kā·ra·kā भस्सकारकाbhas·sa·kā·ra·kā सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe अधिकरणकारकाa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇa·kā·ra·kā सावत्थिंsā·vat·thiṃ आगच्छन्ति।ā·gac·chan·ti

     “te kira, bhante, kosambakā bhikkhū bhaṇḍanakārakā kalahakārakā vivādakārakā bhassakārakā saṅghe adhikaraṇakārakā sāvatthiṁ āgacchanti.

     (Pāli only)

600. 600

     कथाहं,ka·thā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te तेसुte·su भिक्खूसुbhik·khū·su पटिपज्जामी”ति?pa·ṭi·paj·jā·mī

     Kathāhaṁ, bhante, tesu bhikkhūsu paṭipajjāmī”ti?

     adding, “Sir, how should I act toward these monks?”

601. 601

     “तेनte·na हिhi त्वं,tvaṃ गोतमि,go·ta·mi उभयत्थu·bha·yat·tha धम्मंdham·maṃ सुण।su·ṇa

     “Tena hi tvaṁ, gotami, ubhayattha dhammaṁ suṇa.

     “Well, Gotamī, listen to the teaching from both sides.

602. 602

     उभयत्थu·bha·yat·tha धम्मंdham·maṃ सुत्वाsut·vā येye तत्थtat·tha भिक्खूbhik·khū धम्मवादिनोdham·ma·vā·di·no तेसंte·saṃ दिट्ठिञ्चdiṭ·ṭhiñ·ca खन्तिञ्चkhan·tiñ·ca रुचिञ्चru·ciñ·ca आदायञ्चā·dā·yañ·ca रोचेहि।ro·ce·hi

     Ubhayattha dhammaṁ sutvā ye tattha bhikkhū dhammavādino tesaṁ diṭṭhiñca khantiñca ruciñca ādāyañca rocehi.

     Then approve of the views, beliefs, and persuasion of those who speak in accordance with the Teaching.

603. 603

     यञ्चyañ·ca किञ्चिkiñ·ci भिक्खुनिसङ्घेनbhik·khu·ni·saṅ·ghe·na भिक्खुसङ्घतोbhik·khu·saṅ·gha·to पच्चासीसितब्बंpac·cā·sī·si·tab·baṃ सब्बंsab·baṃ तंtaṃ धम्मवादितोवdham·ma·vā·di·to·va पच्चासीसितब्बन्”ति।pac·cā·sī·si·tab·ban

     Yañca kiñci bhikkhunisaṅghena bhikkhusaṅghato paccāsīsitabbaṁ sabbaṁ taṁ dhammavāditova paccāsīsitabban”ti.

     And whatever support the Sangha of nuns seeks from the Sangha of monks, they should get it all from those who speak in accordance with the Teaching.”

604. 604

     अस्सोसिas·so·si खोkho अनाथपिण्डिकोa·nā·tha·piṇ·ḍi·ko गहपति—ga·ha·pa·ti

     Assosi kho anāthapiṇḍiko gahapati—

     When Anāthapiṇḍika heard

605. 605

     “तेte किरki·ra कोसम्बकाko·sam·ba·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū भण्डनकारकाbhaṇ·ḍa·na·kā·ra·kā कलहकारकाka·la·ha·kā·ra·kā विवादकारकाvi·vā·da·kā·ra·kā भस्सकारकाbhas·sa·kā·ra·kā सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe अधिकरणकारकाa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇa·kā·ra·kā सावत्थिंsā·vat·thiṃ आगच्छन्ती”ति।ā·gac·chan·tī

     “te kira kosambakā bhikkhū bhaṇḍanakārakā kalahakārakā vivādakārakā bhassakārakā saṅghe adhikaraṇakārakā sāvatthiṁ āgacchantī”ti.

     that they were coming,

606. 606

     अथa·tha खोkho अनाथपिण्डिकोa·nā·tha·piṇ·ḍi·ko गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

     Atha kho anāthapiṇḍiko gahapati yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

     he too went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down,

607. 607

     एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नोni·sin·no खोkho अनाथपिण्डिकोa·nā·tha·piṇ·ḍi·ko गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho anāthapiṇḍiko gahapati bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     and told him,

608. 608

     “तेte किर,ki·ra भन्ते,bhan·te कोसम्बकाko·sam·ba·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū भण्डनकारकाbhaṇ·ḍa·na·kā·ra·kā कलहकारकाka·la·ha·kā·ra·kā विवादकारकाvi·vā·da·kā·ra·kā भस्सकारकाbhas·sa·kā·ra·kā सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe अधिकरणकारकाa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇa·kā·ra·kā सावत्थिंsā·vat·thiṃ आगच्छन्ति।ā·gac·chan·ti

     “te kira, bhante, kosambakā bhikkhū bhaṇḍanakārakā kalahakārakā vivādakārakā bhassakārakā saṅghe adhikaraṇakārakā sāvatthiṁ āgacchanti.

     (Pāli only)

609. 609

     कथाहं,ka·thā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te तेसुte·su भिक्खूसुbhik·khū·su पटिपज्जामी”ति?pa·ṭi·paj·jā·mī

     Kathāhaṁ, bhante, tesu bhikkhūsu paṭipajjāmī”ti?

     adding, “Sir, how should I act toward these monks?”

610. 610

     “तेनte·na हिhi त्वं,tvaṃ गहपति,ga·ha·pa·ti उभयत्थu·bha·yat·tha दानंdā·naṃ देहि।de·hi

     “Tena hi tvaṁ, gahapati, ubhayattha dānaṁ dehi.

     “Well, householder, make offerings to both sides

611. 611

     उभयत्थu·bha·yat·tha दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā उभयत्थu·bha·yat·tha धम्मंdham·maṃ सुण।su·ṇa

     Ubhayattha dānaṁ datvā ubhayattha dhammaṁ suṇa.

     and listen to their teachings.

612. 612

     उभयत्थu·bha·yat·tha धम्मंdham·maṃ सुत्वाsut·vā येye तत्थtat·tha भिक्खूbhik·khū धम्मवादिनोdham·ma·vā·di·no तेसंte·saṃ दिट्ठिञ्चdiṭ·ṭhiñ·ca खन्तिञ्चkhan·tiñ·ca रुचिञ्चru·ciñ·ca आदायञ्चā·dā·yañ·ca रोचेही”ति।ro·ce·hī

     Ubhayattha dhammaṁ sutvā ye tattha bhikkhū dhammavādino tesaṁ diṭṭhiñca khantiñca ruciñca ādāyañca rocehī”ti.

     Then approve of the views, beliefs, and persuasion of those who speak in accordance with the Teaching.”

613. 613

     अस्सोसिas·so·si खोkho विसाखाvi·sā·khā मिगारमाता—mi·gā·ra·mā·tā

     Assosi kho visākhā migāramātā—

     When Visākhā Migāramātā heard

614. 614

     “तेte किरki·ra कोसम्बकाko·sam·ba·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū भण्डनकारकाbhaṇ·ḍa·na·kā·ra·kā कलहकारकाka·la·ha·kā·ra·kā विवादकारकाvi·vā·da·kā·ra·kā भस्सकारकाbhas·sa·kā·ra·kā सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe अधिकरणकारकाa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇa·kā·ra·kā सावत्थिंsā·vat·thiṃ आगच्छन्ती”ति।ā·gac·chan·tī

     “te kira kosambakā bhikkhū bhaṇḍanakārakā kalahakārakā vivādakārakā bhassakārakā saṅghe adhikaraṇakārakā sāvatthiṁ āgacchantī”ti.

     that they were coming,

615. 615

     अथa·tha खोkho विसाखाvi·sā·khā मिगारमाताmi·gā·ra·mā·tā येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

     Atha kho visākhā migāramātā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

     she too went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down,

616. 616

     एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नाni·sin·nā खोkho विसाखाvi·sā·khā मिगारमाताmi·gā·ra·mā·tā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Ekamantaṁ nisinnā kho visākhā migāramātā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     and told him,

617. 617

     “तेte किर,ki·ra भन्ते,bhan·te कोसम्बकाko·sam·ba·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū भण्डनकारकाbhaṇ·ḍa·na·kā·ra·kā कलहकारकाka·la·ha·kā·ra·kā विवादकारकाvi·vā·da·kā·ra·kā भस्सकारकाbhas·sa·kā·ra·kā सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe अधिकरणकारकाa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇa·kā·ra·kā सावत्थिंsā·vat·thiṃ आगच्छन्ति।ā·gac·chan·ti

     “te kira, bhante, kosambakā bhikkhū bhaṇḍanakārakā kalahakārakā vivādakārakā bhassakārakā saṅghe adhikaraṇakārakā sāvatthiṁ āgacchanti.

     (Pāli only)

618. 618

     कथाहं,ka·thā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te तेसुte·su भिक्खूसुbhik·khū·su पटिपज्जामी”ति?pa·ṭi·paj·jā·mī

     Kathāhaṁ, bhante, tesu bhikkhūsu paṭipajjāmī”ti?

     adding, “Sir, how should I act toward these monks?”

619. 619

     “तेनte·na हिhi त्वं,tvaṃ विसाखे,vi·sā·khe उभयत्थu·bha·yat·tha दानंdā·naṃ देहि।de·hi

     “Tena hi tvaṁ, visākhe, ubhayattha dānaṁ dehi.

     “Well, Visākhā, make offerings to both sides

620. 620

     उभयत्थu·bha·yat·tha दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā उभयत्थu·bha·yat·tha धम्मंdham·maṃ सुण।su·ṇa

     Ubhayattha dānaṁ datvā ubhayattha dhammaṁ suṇa.

     and listen to their teachings.

621. 621

     उभयत्थu·bha·yat·tha धम्मंdham·maṃ सुत्वाsut·vā येye तत्थtat·tha भिक्खूbhik·khū धम्मवादिनोdham·ma·vā·di·no तेसंte·saṃ दिट्ठिञ्चdiṭ·ṭhiñ·ca खन्तिञ्चkhan·tiñ·ca रुचिञ्चru·ciñ·ca आदायञ्चā·dā·yañ·ca रोचेही”ति।ro·ce·hī

     Ubhayattha dhammaṁ sutvā ye tattha bhikkhū dhammavādino tesaṁ diṭṭhiñca khantiñca ruciñca ādāyañca rocehī”ti.

     Then approve of the views, beliefs, and persuasion of those who speak in accordance with the Teaching.”

622. 622

     अथa·tha खोkho कोसम्बकाko·sam·ba·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū अनुपुब्बेनa·nu·pub·be·na येनye·na सावत्थिsā·vat·thi तदवसरुं।ta·da·va·sa·ruṃ

     Atha kho kosambakā bhikkhū anupubbena yena sāvatthi tadavasaruṁ.

     Eventually those monks from Kosambī arrived at Sāvatthī.

623. 623

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā सारिपुत्तोsā·ri·put·to येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

     Atha kho āyasmā sāriputto yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

     Venerable Sāriputta went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down,

624. 624

     एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नोni·sin·no खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā सारिपुत्तोsā·ri·put·to भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā sāriputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     and told him,

625. 625

     “तेte किर,ki·ra भन्ते,bhan·te कोसम्बकाko·sam·ba·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū भण्डनकारकाbhaṇ·ḍa·na·kā·ra·kā कलहकारकाka·la·ha·kā·ra·kā विवादकारकाvi·vā·da·kā·ra·kā भस्सकारकाbhas·sa·kā·ra·kā सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe अधिकरणकारकाa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇa·kā·ra·kā सावत्थिंsā·vat·thiṃ अनुप्पत्ता।a·nup·pat·tā

     “te kira, bhante, kosambakā bhikkhū bhaṇḍanakārakā kalahakārakā vivādakārakā bhassakārakā saṅghe adhikaraṇakārakā sāvatthiṁ anuppattā.

     (Pāli only)

626. 626

     कथंka·thaṃ नुnu खो,kho भन्ते,bhan·te तेसुte·su भिक्खूसुbhik·khū·su सेनासनेse·nā·sa·ne पटिपज्जितब्बन्”ति?pa·ṭi·paj·ji·tab·ban

     Kathaṁ nu kho, bhante, tesu bhikkhūsu senāsane paṭipajjitabban”ti?

     adding, “How should we prepare dwellings for these monks?”

627. 627

     “तेनte·na हि,hi सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta विवित्तंvi·vit·taṃ सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ दातब्बन्”ति।dā·tab·ban

     “Tena hi, sāriputta, vivittaṁ senāsanaṁ dātabban”ti.

     “Give them dwellings in a separate place.”

628. 628

     “सचेsa·ce पन,pa·na भन्ते,bhan·te विवित्तंvi·vit·taṃ नna होति,ho·ti कथंka·thaṃ पटिपज्जितब्बन्”ति?pa·ṭi·paj·ji·tab·ban

     “Sace pana, bhante, vivittaṁ na hoti, kathaṁ paṭipajjitabban”ti?

     “But what should we do if there are no dwellings in a separate place?”

629. 629

     “तेनte·na हि,hi सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta विवित्तंvi·vit·taṃ कत्वापिkat·vā·pi दातब्बं,dā·tab·baṃ

     “Tena hi, sāriputta, vivittaṁ katvāpi dātabbaṁ,

     “In that case, create separate resting places and then give them out.

630. 630

     नna त्वेवाहं,tve·vā·haṃ सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta केनचिke·na·ci परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na वुड्ढतरस्सvuḍ·ḍha·ta·ras·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ पटिबाहितब्बन्तिpa·ṭi·bā·hi·tab·ban·ti वदामि।va·dā·mi

     na tvevāhaṁ, sāriputta, kenaci pariyāyena vuḍḍhatarassa bhikkhuno senāsanaṁ paṭibāhitabbanti vadāmi.

     Under no circumstances, Sāriputta, should a dwelling be reserved for a more senior monk.

631. 631

     योyo पटिबाहेय्य,pa·ṭi·bā·hey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्सा”ति।duk·ka·ṭas·sā

     Yo paṭibāheyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā”ti.

     If you do, you commit an offense of wrong conduct.”

632. 632

     “आमिसेā·mi·se पन,pa·na भन्ते,bhan·te कथंka·thaṃ पटिपज्जितब्बन्”ति?pa·ṭi·paj·ji·tab·ban

     “Āmise pana, bhante, kathaṁ paṭipajjitabban”ti?

     “And what should we do regarding food and requisites?”

633. 633

     “आमिसंā·mi·saṃ खो,kho सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta सब्बेसंsab·be·saṃ समकंsa·ma·kaṃ भाजेतब्बन्”ति।bhā·je·tab·ban

     “Āmisaṁ kho, sāriputta, sabbesaṁ samakaṁ bhājetabban”ti.

     “Food and requisites should be distributed equally to everyone.”

634. 634

     7। ओसारणानुजाननo·sā·ra·ṇā·nu·jā·na·na

     7. Osāraṇānujānana

     7. The instruction to readmit

635. 635

     अथa·tha खोkho तस्सtas·sa उक्खित्तकस्सuk·khit·ta·kas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no धम्मञ्चdham·mañ·ca विनयञ्चvi·na·yañ·ca पच्चवेक्खन्तस्सpac·ca·vek·khan·tas·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     Atha kho tassa ukkhittakassa bhikkhuno dhammañca vinayañca paccavekkhantassa etadahosi—

     Then that ejected monk reflected on the Teaching and the Monastic Law, and he concluded,

636. 636

     “आपत्तिā·pat·ti एसा,e·sā नेसाne·sā अनापत्ति।a·nā·pat·ti

     “āpatti esā, nesā anāpatti.

     “This is an offense

637. 637

     आपन्नोम्हि,ā·pan·nom·hi नम्हिnam·hi अनापन्नो।a·nā·pan·no

     Āpannomhi, namhi anāpanno.

     and I’ve committed it.

638. 638

     उक्खित्तोम्हि,uk·khit·tom·hi नम्हिnam·hi अनुक्खित्तो।a·nuk·khit·to

     Ukkhittomhi, namhi anukkhitto.

     I’ve been ejected,

639. 639

     धम्मिकेनम्हिdham·mi·ke·nam·hi कम्मेनkam·me·na उक्खित्तोuk·khit·to अकुप्पेनa·kup·pe·na ठानारहेना”ति।ṭhā·nā·ra·he·nā

     Dhammikenamhi kammena ukkhitto akuppena ṭhānārahenā”ti.

     for the legal procedure was legitimate, irreversible, and fit to stand.”

640. 640

     अथa·tha खोkho सोso उक्खित्तकोuk·khit·ta·ko भिक्खुbhik·khu येनye·na उक्खित्तानुवत्तकाuk·khit·tā·nu·vat·ta·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā उक्खित्तानुवत्तकेuk·khit·tā·nu·vat·ta·ke भिक्खूbhik·khū एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho so ukkhittako bhikkhu yena ukkhittānuvattakā bhikkhū tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā ukkhittānuvattake bhikkhū etadavoca—

     He went to those who were siding with him and told them

641. 641

     “आपत्तिā·pat·ti एसा,e·sā आवुसो;ā·vu·so

     “āpatti esā, āvuso;

     what he had been thinking,

642. 642

     नेसाne·sā अनापत्ति।a·nā·pat·ti

     nesā anāpatti.

     (Pāli only)

643. 643

     आपन्नोम्हि,ā·pan·nom·hi नम्हिnam·hi अनापन्नो।a·nā·pan·no

     Āpannomhi, namhi anāpanno.

     (Pāli only)

644. 644

     उक्खित्तोम्हि,uk·khit·tom·hi नम्हिnam·hi अनुक्खित्तो।a·nuk·khit·to

     Ukkhittomhi, namhi anukkhitto.

     (Pāli only)

645. 645

     धम्मिकेनम्हिdham·mi·ke·nam·hi कम्मेनkam·me·na उक्खित्तोuk·khit·to अकुप्पेनa·kup·pe·na ठानारहेन।ṭhā·nā·ra·he·na

     Dhammikenamhi kammena ukkhitto akuppena ṭhānārahena.

     (Pāli only)

646. 646

     एथe·tha मंmaṃ आयस्मन्तोā·yas·man·to ओसारेथा”ति।o·sā·re·thā

     Etha maṁ āyasmanto osārethā”ti.

     adding, “Come, venerables, please readmit me.”

647. 647

     अथa·tha खोkho तेte उक्खित्तानुवत्तकाuk·khit·tā·nu·vat·ta·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū तंtaṃ उक्खित्तकंuk·khit·ta·kaṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ आदायā·dā·ya येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदिंसु।ni·sī·diṃ·su

     Atha kho te ukkhittānuvattakā bhikkhū taṁ ukkhittakaṁ bhikkhuṁ ādāya yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.

     They then took that monk to the Buddha, bowed, sat down,

648. 648

     एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नाni·sin·nā खोkho तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

     Ekamantaṁ nisinnā kho te bhikkhū bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ—

     and told him

649. 649

     “अयं,a·yaṃ भन्ते,bhan·te उक्खित्तकोuk·khit·ta·ko भिक्खुbhik·khu एवमाह—e·va·mā·ha

     “ayaṁ, bhante, ukkhittako bhikkhu evamāha—

     what had happened,

650. 650

     ‘आपत्तिā·pat·ti एसा,e·sā आवुसो;ā·vu·so

     ‘āpatti esā, āvuso;

     (Pāli only)

651. 651

     नेसाne·sā अनापत्ति।a·nā·pat·ti

     nesā anāpatti.

     (Pāli only)

652. 652

     आपन्नोम्हि,ā·pan·nom·hi नम्हिnam·hi अनापन्नो।a·nā·pan·no

     Āpannomhi, namhi anāpanno.

     (Pāli only)

653. 653

     उक्खित्तोम्हि,uk·khit·tom·hi नम्हिnam·hi अनुक्खित्तो।a·nuk·khit·to

     Ukkhittomhi, namhi anukkhitto.

     (Pāli only)

654. 654

     धम्मिकेनम्हिdham·mi·ke·nam·hi कम्मेनkam·me·na उक्खित्तोuk·khit·to अकुप्पेनa·kup·pe·na ठानारहेन।ṭhā·nā·ra·he·na

     Dhammikenamhi kammena ukkhitto akuppena ṭhānārahena.

     (Pāli only)

655. 655

     एथe·tha मंmaṃ आयस्मन्तोā·yas·man·to ओसारेथा’ति।o·sā·re·thā

     Etha maṁ āyasmanto osārethā’ti.

     (Pāli only)

656. 656

     कथंka·thaṃ नुnu खो,kho भन्ते,bhan·te पटिपज्जितब्बन्”ति?pa·ṭi·paj·ji·tab·ban

     Kathaṁ nu kho, bhante, paṭipajjitabban”ti?

     adding, “Sir, what should we do now?”

657. 657

     “आपत्तिā·pat·ti एसा,e·sā भिक्खवे;bhik·kha·ve

     “Āpatti esā, bhikkhave;

     “This is an offense, monks,

658. 658

     नेसाne·sā अनापत्ति।a·nā·pat·ti

     nesā anāpatti.

     (Pāli only)

659. 659

     आपन्नोā·pan·no एसोe·so भिक्खु,bhik·khu नेसोne·so भिक्खुbhik·khu अनापन्नो।a·nā·pan·no

     Āpanno eso bhikkhu, neso bhikkhu anāpanno.

     and this monk has committed it.

660. 660

     उक्खित्तोuk·khit·to एसोe·so भिक्खु,bhik·khu नेसोne·so भिक्खुbhik·khu अनुक्खित्तो।a·nuk·khit·to

     Ukkhitto eso bhikkhu, neso bhikkhu anukkhitto.

     He’s been ejected,

661. 661

     धम्मिकेनdham·mi·ke·na कम्मेनkam·me·na उक्खित्तोuk·khit·to अकुप्पेनa·kup·pe·na ठानारहेन।ṭhā·nā·ra·he·na

     Dhammikena kammena ukkhitto akuppena ṭhānārahena.

     for the legal procedure was legitimate, irreversible, and fit to stand.

662. 662

     यतोya·to चca खोkho सो,so भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu आपन्नोā·pan·no चca उक्खित्तोuk·khit·to चca पस्सतिpas·sa·ti च,ca तेनte·na हि,hi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तंtaṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ ओसारेथा”ति।o·sā·re·thā

     Yato ca kho so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu āpanno ca ukkhitto ca passati ca, tena hi, bhikkhave, taṁ bhikkhuṁ osārethā”ti.

     But since he recognizes this, he should be readmitted.”

663. 663

     8। सङ्घसामग्गीकथाsaṅ·gha·sā·mag·gī·ka·thā

     8. Saṅghasāmaggīkathā

     8. Discussion of unity in the Sangha

664. 664

     अथa·tha खोkho तेte उक्खित्तानुवत्तकाuk·khit·tā·nu·vat·ta·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū तंtaṃ उक्खित्तकंuk·khit·ta·kaṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ ओसारेत्वाo·sā·ret·vā येनye·na उक्खेपकाuk·khe·pa·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā उक्खेपकेuk·khe·pa·ke भिक्खूbhik·khū एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

     Atha kho te ukkhittānuvattakā bhikkhū taṁ ukkhittakaṁ bhikkhuṁ osāretvā yena ukkhepakā bhikkhū tenupasaṅkamiṁsu, upasaṅkamitvā ukkhepake bhikkhū etadavocuṁ—

     Soon afterwards the monks who had been siding with the ejected monk readmitted him. They then went to the monks who had ejected him and said,

665. 665

     “यस्मिं,yas·miṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so वत्थुस्मिंvat·thus·miṃ अहोसिa·ho·si सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa भण्डनंbhaṇ·ḍa·naṃ कलहोka·la·ho विग्गहोvig·ga·ho विवादोvi·vā·do सङ्घभेदोsaṅ·gha·bhe·do सङ्घराजिsaṅ·gha·rā·ji सङ्घववत्थानंsaṅ·gha·va·vat·thā·naṃ सङ्घनानाकरणं,saṅ·gha·nā·nā·ka·ra·ṇaṃ सोso एसोe·so भिक्खुbhik·khu आपन्नोā·pan·no चca उक्खित्तोuk·khit·to चca पस्सिpas·si चca ओसारितोo·sā·ri·to च।ca

     “yasmiṁ, āvuso, vatthusmiṁ ahosi saṅghassa bhaṇḍanaṁ kalaho viggaho vivādo saṅghabhedo saṅgharāji saṅghavavatthānaṁ saṅghanānākaraṇaṁ, so eso bhikkhu āpanno ca ukkhitto ca passi ca osārito ca.

     “This monk has recognized that he had committed an offense and was ejected. He’s now been readmitted. Because of this, the basis for the arguments and disputes in the Sangha, for the schism, fracture, and separation in the Sangha, has been removed.

666. 666

     हन्दhan·da मयं,ma·yaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so तस्सtas·sa वत्थुस्सvat·thus·sa वूपसमायvū·pa·sa·mā·ya सङ्घसामग्गिंsaṅ·gha·sā·mag·giṃ करोमा”ति।ka·ro·mā

     Handa mayaṁ, āvuso, tassa vatthussa vūpasamāya saṅghasāmaggiṁ karomā”ti.

     To resolve this matter, let’s unify the Sangha.”

667. 667

     अथa·tha खोkho तेte उक्खेपकाuk·khe·pa·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदिंसु।ni·sī·diṃ·su

     Atha kho te ukkhepakā bhikkhū yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.

     The monks who had done the ejection went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down,

668. 668

     एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नाni·sin·nā खोkho तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

     Ekamantaṁ nisinnā kho te bhikkhū bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ—

     and told him

669. 669

     “ते,te भन्ते,bhan·te उक्खित्तानुवत्तकाuk·khit·tā·nu·vat·ta·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū एवमाहंसु—e·va·mā·haṃ·su

     “te, bhante, ukkhittānuvattakā bhikkhū evamāhaṁsu—

     what had happened,

670. 670

     ‘यस्मिं,yas·miṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so वत्थुस्मिंvat·thus·miṃ अहोसिa·ho·si सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa भण्डनंbhaṇ·ḍa·naṃ कलहोka·la·ho विग्गहोvig·ga·ho विवादोvi·vā·do सङ्घभेदोsaṅ·gha·bhe·do सङ्घराजिsaṅ·gha·rā·ji सङ्घववत्थानंsaṅ·gha·va·vat·thā·naṃ सङ्घनानाकरणं,saṅ·gha·nā·nā·ka·ra·ṇaṃ सोso एसोe·so भिक्खुbhik·khu आपन्नोā·pan·no चca उक्खित्तोuk·khit·to चca पस्सिpas·si चca ओसारितोo·sā·ri·to च।ca

     ‘yasmiṁ, āvuso, vatthusmiṁ ahosi saṅghassa bhaṇḍanaṁ kalaho viggaho vivādo saṅghabhedo saṅgharāji saṅghavavatthānaṁ saṅghanānākaraṇaṁ, so eso bhikkhu āpanno ca ukkhitto ca passi ca osārito ca.

     (Pāli only)

671. 671

     हन्दhan·da मयं,ma·yaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so तस्सtas·sa वत्थुस्सvat·thus·sa वूपसमायvū·pa·sa·mā·ya सङ्घसामग्गिंsaṅ·gha·sā·mag·giṃ करोमा’ति।ka·ro·mā

     Handa mayaṁ, āvuso, tassa vatthussa vūpasamāya saṅghasāmaggiṁ karomā’ti.

     (Pāli only)

672. 672

     कथंka·thaṃ नुnu खो,kho भन्ते,bhan·te पटिपज्जितब्बन्”ति?pa·ṭi·paj·ji·tab·ban

     Kathaṁ nu kho, bhante, paṭipajjitabban”ti?

     adding, “How should we proceed with this?”

673. 673

     “यतोya·to चca खोkho सो,so भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu आपन्नोā·pan·no चca उक्खित्तोuk·khit·to चca पस्सिpas·si चca ओसारितोo·sā·ri·to च,ca तेनte·na हि,hi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सङ्घोsaṅ·gho तस्सtas·sa वत्थुस्सvat·thus·sa वूपसमायvū·pa·sa·mā·ya सङ्घसामग्गिंsaṅ·gha·sā·mag·giṃ करोतु।ka·ro·tu

     “Yato ca kho so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu āpanno ca ukkhitto ca passi ca osārito ca, tena hi, bhikkhave, saṅgho tassa vatthussa vūpasamāya saṅghasāmaggiṁ karotu.

     “This being the case, you should resolve this matter by unifying the Sangha.

674. 674

     एवञ्चe·vañ·ca पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve कातब्बा।kā·tab·bā

     Evañca pana, bhikkhave, kātabbā.

     And it should be done like this.

675. 675

     सब्बेहेवsab·be·he·va एकज्झंe·kaj·jhaṃ सन्निपतितब्बंsan·ni·pa·ti·tab·baṃ गिलानेहिgi·lā·ne·hi चca अगिलानेहिa·gi·lā·ne·hi च।ca

     Sabbeheva ekajjhaṁ sannipatitabbaṁ gilānehi ca agilānehi ca.

     Everyone should gather in one place, including those who are sick.

676. 676

     नna केहिचिke·hi·ci छन्दोchan·do दातब्बो।dā·tab·bo

     Na kehici chando dātabbo.

     No one should give their consent.

677. 677

     सन्निपतित्वाsan·ni·pa·tit·vā ब्यत्तेनbyat·te·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā पटिबलेनpa·ṭi·ba·le·na सङ्घोsaṅ·gho ञापेतब्बो—ñā·pe·tab·bo

     Sannipatitvā byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena saṅgho ñāpetabbo—

     A competent and capable monk should then inform the Sangha:

678. 678

     ‘सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

     ‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

     ‘Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.

679. 679

     यस्मिंyas·miṃ वत्थुस्मिंvat·thus·miṃ अहोसिa·ho·si सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa भण्डनंbhaṇ·ḍa·naṃ कलहोka·la·ho विग्गहोvig·ga·ho विवादोvi·vā·do सङ्घभेदोsaṅ·gha·bhe·do सङ्घराजिsaṅ·gha·rā·ji सङ्घववत्थानंsaṅ·gha·va·vat·thā·naṃ सङ्घनानाकरणं,saṅ·gha·nā·nā·ka·ra·ṇaṃ सोso एसोe·so भिक्खुbhik·khu आपन्नोā·pan·no चca उक्खित्तोuk·khit·to चca पस्सिpas·si चca ओसारितोo·sā·ri·to च।ca

     Yasmiṁ vatthusmiṁ ahosi saṅghassa bhaṇḍanaṁ kalaho viggaho vivādo saṅghabhedo saṅgharāji saṅghavavatthānaṁ saṅghanānākaraṇaṁ, so eso bhikkhu āpanno ca ukkhitto ca passi ca osārito ca.

     This monk has recognized that he had committed an offense and was ejected. He’s now been readmitted. Because of this, the basis for the arguments and disputes in the Sangha, for the schism, fracture, and separation in the Sangha, has been removed.

680. 680

     यदिya·di सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa पत्तकल्लं,pat·ta·kal·laṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho तस्सtas·sa वत्थुस्सvat·thus·sa वूपसमायvū·pa·sa·mā·ya सङ्घसामग्गिंsaṅ·gha·sā·mag·giṃ करेय्य।ka·rey·ya

     Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṁ, saṅgho tassa vatthussa vūpasamāya saṅghasāmaggiṁ kareyya.

     If the Sangha is ready, let’s resolve this matter by unifying the Sangha.

681. 681

     एसाe·sā ञत्ति।ñat·ti

     Esā ñatti.

     This is the motion.

682. 682

     सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

     Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

     Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.

683. 683

     यस्मिंyas·miṃ वत्थुस्मिंvat·thus·miṃ अहोसिa·ho·si सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa भण्डनंbhaṇ·ḍa·naṃ कलहोka·la·ho विग्गहोvig·ga·ho विवादोvi·vā·do सङ्घभेदोsaṅ·gha·bhe·do सङ्घराजिsaṅ·gha·rā·ji सङ्घववत्थानंsaṅ·gha·va·vat·thā·naṃ सङ्घनानाकरणं,saṅ·gha·nā·nā·ka·ra·ṇaṃ सोso एसोe·so भिक्खुbhik·khu आपन्नोā·pan·no चca उक्खित्तोuk·khit·to चca पस्सिpas·si चca ओसारितोo·sā·ri·to च।ca

     Yasmiṁ vatthusmiṁ ahosi saṅghassa bhaṇḍanaṁ kalaho viggaho vivādo saṅghabhedo saṅgharāji saṅghavavatthānaṁ saṅghanānākaraṇaṁ, so eso bhikkhu āpanno ca ukkhitto ca passi ca osārito ca.

     This monk has recognized that he had committed an offense and was ejected. He’s now been readmitted. Because of this, the basis for the arguments and disputes in the Sangha, for the schism, fracture, and separation in the Sangha, has been removed.

684. 684

     सङ्घोsaṅ·gho तस्सtas·sa वत्थुस्सvat·thus·sa वूपसमायvū·pa·sa·mā·ya सङ्घसामग्गिंsaṅ·gha·sā·mag·giṃ करोति।ka·ro·ti

     Saṅgho tassa vatthussa vūpasamāya saṅghasāmaggiṁ karoti.

     The Sangha resolves this matter by unifying the Sangha.

685. 685

     यस्सायस्मतोyas·sā·yas·ma·to खमतिkha·ma·ti तस्सtas·sa वत्थुस्सvat·thus·sa वूपसमायvū·pa·sa·mā·ya सङ्घसामग्गियाsaṅ·gha·sā·mag·gi·yā करणं,ka·ra·ṇaṃ सोso तुण्हस्स,tuṇ·has·sa यस्सyas·sa नक्खमतिnak·kha·ma·ti सोso भासेय्य।bhā·sey·ya

     Yassāyasmato khamati tassa vatthussa vūpasamāya saṅghasāmaggiyā karaṇaṁ, so tuṇhassa, yassa nakkhamati so bhāseyya.

     Any monk who approves of resolving this matter by unifying Sangha should remain silent. Any monk who doesn’t approve should speak up.

686. 686

     कताka·tā सङ्घेनsaṅ·ghe·na तस्सtas·sa वत्थुस्सvat·thus·sa वूपसमायvū·pa·sa·mā·ya सङ्घसामग्गी।saṅ·gha·sā·mag·gī

     Katā saṅghena tassa vatthussa vūpasamāya saṅghasāmaggī.

     The Sangha has resolved this matter by unifying the Sangha.

687. 687

     निहतोni·ha·to सङ्घभेदो,saṅ·gha·bhe·do निहताni·ha·tā सङ्घराजि,saṅ·gha·rā·ji निहतंni·ha·taṃ सङ्घववत्थानं,saṅ·gha·va·vat·thā·naṃ निहतंni·ha·taṃ सङ्घनानाकरणं।saṅ·gha·nā·nā·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

     Nihato saṅghabhedo, nihatā saṅgharāji, nihataṁ saṅghavavatthānaṁ, nihataṁ saṅghanānākaraṇaṁ.

     The schism in the Sangha has come to an end. The fracture in the Sangha has come to an end. The separation in the Sangha has come to an end.

688. 688

     खमतिkha·ma·ti सङ्घस्स,saṅ·ghas·sa तस्माtas·mā तुण्ही,tuṇ·hī एवमेतंe·va·me·taṃ धारयामी’ति।dhā·ra·yā·mī

     Khamati saṅghassa, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṁ dhārayāmī’ti.

     The Sangha approves and is therefore silent. I will remember it thus.’

689. 689

     तावदेवtā·va·de·va उपोसथोu·po·sa·tho कातब्बो,kā·tab·bo पातिमोक्खंpā·ti·mok·khaṃ उद्दिसितब्बन्”ति।ud·di·si·tab·ban

     Tāvadeva uposatho kātabbo, pātimokkhaṁ uddisitabban”ti.

     The observance-day ceremony, the recitation of the Monastic Code, should be done straightaway.”

690. 690

     9। उपालिसङ्घसामग्गीपुच्छाu·pā·li·saṅ·gha·sā·mag·gī·puc·chā

     9. Upālisaṅghasāmaggīpucchā

     9. Upāli’s questions about unity in the Sangha

691. 691

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā उपालिu·pā·li येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

     Atha kho āyasmā upāli yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

     Soon afterwards Venerable Upāli went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down,

692. 692

     एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नोni·sin·no खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā उपालिu·pā·li भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā upāli bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     and said,

693. 693

     “यस्मिं,yas·miṃ भन्ते,bhan·te वत्थुस्मिंvat·thus·miṃ होतिho·ti सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa भण्डनंbhaṇ·ḍa·naṃ कलहोka·la·ho विग्गहोvig·ga·ho विवादोvi·vā·do सङ्घभेदोsaṅ·gha·bhe·do सङ्घराजिsaṅ·gha·rā·ji सङ्घववत्थानंsaṅ·gha·va·vat·thā·naṃ सङ्घनानाकरणं,saṅ·gha·nā·nā·ka·ra·ṇaṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho तंtaṃ वत्थुंvat·thuṃ अविनिच्छिनित्वाa·vi·nic·chi·nit·vā अमूलाa·mū·lā मूलंmū·laṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā सङ्घसामग्गिंsaṅ·gha·sā·mag·giṃ करोति,ka·ro·ti धम्मिकाdham·mi·kā नुnu खोkho सा,sā भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घसामग्गी”ति?saṅ·gha·sā·mag·gī

     “yasmiṁ, bhante, vatthusmiṁ hoti saṅghassa bhaṇḍanaṁ kalaho viggaho vivādo saṅghabhedo saṅgharāji saṅghavavatthānaṁ saṅghanānākaraṇaṁ, saṅgho taṁ vatthuṁ avinicchinitvā amūlā mūlaṁ gantvā saṅghasāmaggiṁ karoti, dhammikā nu kho sā, bhante, saṅghasāmaggī”ti?

     “Sir, if the basis for the arguments and disputes in the Sangha, for the schism, fracture, and separation in the Sangha, hasn’t been decided by the Sangha, hasn’t been resolved by the Sangha, yet the Sangha unifies the Sangha—is that unity in the Sangha legitimate?”

694. 694

     “यस्मिं,yas·miṃ उपालि,u·pā·li वत्थुस्मिंvat·thus·miṃ होतिho·ti सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa भण्डनंbhaṇ·ḍa·naṃ कलहोka·la·ho विग्गहोvig·ga·ho विवादोvi·vā·do सङ्घभेदोsaṅ·gha·bhe·do सङ्घराजिsaṅ·gha·rā·ji सङ्घववत्थानंsaṅ·gha·va·vat·thā·naṃ सङ्घनानाकरणं,saṅ·gha·nā·nā·ka·ra·ṇaṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho तंtaṃ वत्थुंvat·thuṃ अविनिच्छिनित्वाa·vi·nic·chi·nit·vā अमूलाa·mū·lā मूलंmū·laṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā सङ्घसामग्गिंsaṅ·gha·sā·mag·giṃ करोति,ka·ro·ti अधम्मिकाa·dham·mi·kā सा,sā उपालि,u·pā·li सङ्घसामग्गी”ति।saṅ·gha·sā·mag·gī

     “Yasmiṁ, upāli, vatthusmiṁ hoti saṅghassa bhaṇḍanaṁ kalaho viggaho vivādo saṅghabhedo saṅgharāji saṅghavavatthānaṁ saṅghanānākaraṇaṁ, saṅgho taṁ vatthuṁ avinicchinitvā amūlā mūlaṁ gantvā saṅghasāmaggiṁ karoti, adhammikā sā, upāli, saṅghasāmaggī”ti.

     “That unity in the Sangha is illegitimate.”

695. 695

     “यस्मिंyas·miṃ पन,pa·na भन्ते,bhan·te वत्थुस्मिंvat·thus·miṃ होतिho·ti सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa भण्डनंbhaṇ·ḍa·naṃ कलहोka·la·ho विग्गहोvig·ga·ho विवादोvi·vā·do सङ्घभेदोsaṅ·gha·bhe·do सङ्घराजिsaṅ·gha·rā·ji सङ्घववत्थानंsaṅ·gha·va·vat·thā·naṃ सङ्घनानाकरणं,saṅ·gha·nā·nā·ka·ra·ṇaṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho तंtaṃ वत्थुंvat·thuṃ विनिच्छिनित्वाvi·nic·chi·nit·vā मूलाmū·lā मूलंmū·laṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā सङ्घसामग्गिंsaṅ·gha·sā·mag·giṃ करोति,ka·ro·ti धम्मिकाdham·mi·kā नुnu खोkho सा,sā भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घसामग्गी”ति?saṅ·gha·sā·mag·gī

     “Yasmiṁ pana, bhante, vatthusmiṁ hoti saṅghassa bhaṇḍanaṁ kalaho viggaho vivādo saṅghabhedo saṅgharāji saṅghavavatthānaṁ saṅghanānākaraṇaṁ, saṅgho taṁ vatthuṁ vinicchinitvā mūlā mūlaṁ gantvā saṅghasāmaggiṁ karoti, dhammikā nu kho sā, bhante, saṅghasāmaggī”ti?

     “If the basis for the arguments and disputes in the Sangha, for the schism, fracture, and separation in the Sangha, has been decided by the Sangha, has been resolved by the Sangha, and the Sangha then unifies the Sangha—is that unity in the Sangha legitimate?”

696. 696

     “यस्मिं,yas·miṃ उपालि,u·pā·li वत्थुस्मिंvat·thus·miṃ होतिho·ti सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa भण्डनंbhaṇ·ḍa·naṃ कलहोka·la·ho विग्गहोvig·ga·ho विवादोvi·vā·do सङ्घभेदोsaṅ·gha·bhe·do सङ्घराजिsaṅ·gha·rā·ji सङ्घववत्थानंsaṅ·gha·va·vat·thā·naṃ सङ्घनानाकरणं,saṅ·gha·nā·nā·ka·ra·ṇaṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho तंtaṃ वत्थुंvat·thuṃ विनिच्छिनित्वाvi·nic·chi·nit·vā मूलाmū·lā मूलंmū·laṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā सङ्घसामग्गिंsaṅ·gha·sā·mag·giṃ करोति,ka·ro·ti धम्मिकाdham·mi·kā सा,sā उपालि,u·pā·li सङ्घसामग्गी”ति।saṅ·gha·sā·mag·gī

     “Yasmiṁ, upāli, vatthusmiṁ hoti saṅghassa bhaṇḍanaṁ kalaho viggaho vivādo saṅghabhedo saṅgharāji saṅghavavatthānaṁ saṅghanānākaraṇaṁ, saṅgho taṁ vatthuṁ vinicchinitvā mūlā mūlaṁ gantvā saṅghasāmaggiṁ karoti, dhammikā sā, upāli, saṅghasāmaggī”ti.

     “That unity in the Sangha is legitimate.”

697. 697

     “कतिka·ti नुnu खो,kho भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घसामग्गियो”ति?saṅ·gha·sā·mag·gi·yo

     “Kati nu kho, bhante, saṅghasāmaggiyo”ti?

     “And sir, how many kinds of unity in the Sangha are there?”

698. 698

     “द्वेमा,dve·mā उपालि,u·pā·li सङ्घसामग्गियो—saṅ·gha·sā·mag·gi·yo

     “Dvemā, upāli, saṅghasāmaggiyo—

     “There are two kinds of unity in the Sangha.

699. 699

     अत्थुपालि,at·thu·pā·li सङ्घसामग्गीsaṅ·gha·sā·mag·gī अत्थापेताat·thā·pe·tā ब्यञ्जनुपेता;byañ·ja·nu·pe·tā

     atthupāli, saṅghasāmaggī atthāpetā byañjanupetā;

     There’s the unity in the Sangha where the wording is fulfilled, but not the purpose.

700. 700

     अत्थुपालि,at·thu·pā·li सङ्घसामग्गीsaṅ·gha·sā·mag·gī अत्थुपेताat·thu·pe·tā चca ब्यञ्जनुपेताbyañ·ja·nu·pe·tā च।ca

     atthupāli, saṅghasāmaggī atthupetā ca byañjanupetā ca.

     And there’s the unity in the Sangha where both the wording and the purpose are fulfilled.

701. 701

     कतमाka·ta·mā च,ca उपालि,u·pā·li सङ्घसामग्गीsaṅ·gha·sā·mag·gī अत्थापेताat·thā·pe·tā ब्यञ्जनुपेता?byañ·ja·nu·pe·tā

     Katamā ca, upāli, saṅghasāmaggī atthāpetā byañjanupetā?

     (Pāli only)

702. 702

     यस्मिं,yas·miṃ उपालि,u·pā·li वत्थुस्मिंvat·thus·miṃ होतिho·ti सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa भण्डनंbhaṇ·ḍa·naṃ कलहोka·la·ho विग्गहोvig·ga·ho विवादोvi·vā·do सङ्घभेदोsaṅ·gha·bhe·do सङ्घराजिsaṅ·gha·rā·ji सङ्घववत्थानंsaṅ·gha·va·vat·thā·naṃ सङ्घनानाकरणं,saṅ·gha·nā·nā·ka·ra·ṇaṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho तंtaṃ वत्थुंvat·thuṃ अविनिच्छिनित्वाa·vi·nic·chi·nit·vā अमूलाa·mū·lā मूलंmū·laṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā सङ्घसामग्गिंsaṅ·gha·sā·mag·giṃ करोति,ka·ro·ti अयंa·yaṃ वुच्चति,vuc·ca·ti उपालि,u·pā·li सङ्घसामग्गीsaṅ·gha·sā·mag·gī अत्थापेताat·thā·pe·tā ब्यञ्जनुपेता।byañ·ja·nu·pe·tā

     Yasmiṁ, upāli, vatthusmiṁ hoti saṅghassa bhaṇḍanaṁ kalaho viggaho vivādo saṅghabhedo saṅgharāji saṅghavavatthānaṁ saṅghanānākaraṇaṁ, saṅgho taṁ vatthuṁ avinicchinitvā amūlā mūlaṁ gantvā saṅghasāmaggiṁ karoti, ayaṁ vuccati, upāli, saṅghasāmaggī atthāpetā byañjanupetā.

     If the basis for the arguments and disputes in the Sangha, for the schism, fracture, and separation in the Sangha, hasn’t been decided by the Sangha, hasn’t been resolved by the Sangha, yet the Sangha unifies the Sangha, this is called unity in the Sangha where the wording is fulfilled, but not the purpose.

703. 703

     कतमाka·ta·mā च,ca उपालि,u·pā·li सङ्घसामग्गीsaṅ·gha·sā·mag·gī अत्थुपेताat·thu·pe·tā चca ब्यञ्जनुपेताbyañ·ja·nu·pe·tā च?ca

     Katamā ca, upāli, saṅghasāmaggī atthupetā ca byañjanupetā ca?

     (Pāli only)

704. 704

     यस्मिं,yas·miṃ उपालि,u·pā·li वत्थुस्मिंvat·thus·miṃ होतिho·ti सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa भण्डनंbhaṇ·ḍa·naṃ कलहोka·la·ho विग्गहोvig·ga·ho विवादोvi·vā·do सङ्घभेदोsaṅ·gha·bhe·do सङ्घराजिsaṅ·gha·rā·ji सङ्घववत्थानंsaṅ·gha·va·vat·thā·naṃ सङ्घनानाकरणं,saṅ·gha·nā·nā·ka·ra·ṇaṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho तंtaṃ वत्थुंvat·thuṃ विनिच्छिनित्वाvi·nic·chi·nit·vā मूलाmū·lā मूलंmū·laṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā सङ्घसामग्गिंsaṅ·gha·sā·mag·giṃ करोति,ka·ro·ti अयंa·yaṃ वुच्चति,vuc·ca·ti उपालि,u·pā·li सङ्घसामग्गीsaṅ·gha·sā·mag·gī अत्थुपेताat·thu·pe·tā चca ब्यञ्जनुपेताbyañ·ja·nu·pe·tā च।ca

     Yasmiṁ, upāli, vatthusmiṁ hoti saṅghassa bhaṇḍanaṁ kalaho viggaho vivādo saṅghabhedo saṅgharāji saṅghavavatthānaṁ saṅghanānākaraṇaṁ, saṅgho taṁ vatthuṁ vinicchinitvā mūlā mūlaṁ gantvā saṅghasāmaggiṁ karoti, ayaṁ vuccati, upāli, saṅghasāmaggī atthupetā ca byañjanupetā ca.

     If the basis for the arguments and disputes in the Sangha, for the schism, fracture, and separation in the Sangha, has been decided by the Sangha, has been resolved by the Sangha, and the Sangha then unifies the Sangha, this is called unity in the Sangha where both the wording and the purpose are fulfilled.”

705. 705

     इमाi·mā खो,kho उपालि,u·pā·li द्वेdve सङ्घसामग्गियो”ति।saṅ·gha·sā·mag·gi·yo

     Imā kho, upāli, dve saṅghasāmaggiyo”ti.

     (Pāli only)

706. 706

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā उपालिu·pā·li उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā एकंसंe·kaṃ·saṃ उत्तरासङ्गंut·ta·rā·saṅ·gaṃ करित्वाka·rit·vā येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनञ्जलिंte·nañ·ja·liṃ पणामेत्वाpa·ṇā·met·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ गाथायgā·thā·ya अज्झभासि—aj·jha·bhā·si

     Atha kho āyasmā upāli uṭṭhāyāsanā ekaṁsaṁ uttarāsaṅgaṁ karitvā yena bhagavā tenañjaliṁ paṇāmetvā bhagavantaṁ gāthāya ajjhabhāsi—

     Upāli then got up from his seat, arrange his upper robe over one shoulder, raise his joined palms, and spoke to the Buddha in verse:

707. 707

     “सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa किच्चेसुkic·ce·su चca मन्तनासुman·ta·nā·su च,ca

     “Saṅghassa kiccesu ca mantanāsu ca,

     “In regard to the duties and discussions of the Sangha,

708. 708

     अत्थेसुat·the·su जातेसुjā·te·su विनिच्छयेसुvi·nic·cha·ye·su च;ca

     Atthesu jātesu vinicchayesu ca;

     In regard to the business that arises <j>and the investigations—

709. 709

     कथंपकारोधka·thaṃ·pa·kā·ro·dha नरोna·ro महत्थिको,ma·hat·thi·ko

     Kathaṁpakārodha naro mahatthiko,

     A person of great value, how does he handle these?

710. 710

     भिक्खुbhik·khu कथंka·thaṃ होतिधho·ti·dha पग्गहारहो”ति।pag·ga·hā·ra·ho

     Bhikkhu kathaṁ hotidha paggahāraho”ti.

     How is a monk fit to deal with these?”

711. 711

     “अनानुवज्जोa·nā·nu·vaj·jo पठमेनpa·ṭha·me·na सीलतो,sī·la·to

     “Anānuvajjo paṭhamena sīlato,

     “Blameless in the basic morality,

712. 712

     अवेक्खिताचारोa·vek·khi·tā·cā·ro सुसंवुतिन्द्रियो;su·saṃ·vu·tin·dri·yo

     Avekkhitācāro susaṁvutindriyo;

     Watching his own behavior, <j>with senses well-restrained—

713. 713

     पच्चत्थिकाpac·cat·thi·kā नूपवदन्तिnū·pa·va·dan·ti धम्मतो,dham·ma·to

     Paccatthikā nūpavadanti dhammato,

     His enemies cannot legitimately criticize him;

714. 714

     नna हिस्सhis·sa तंtaṃ होतिho·ti वदेय्युva·dey·yu येनye·na नं।naṃ

     Na hissa taṁ hoti vadeyyu yena naṁ.

     There’s nothing for them to correct in him.

715. 715

     सोso तादिसोtā·di·so सीलविसुद्धियाsī·la·vi·sud·dhi·yā ठितो,ṭhi·to

     So tādiso sīlavisuddhiyā ṭhito,

     Having such purity of conduct,

716. 716

     विसारदोvi·sā·ra·do होतिho·ti विसय्हvi·say·ha भासति;bhā·sa·ti

     Visārado hoti visayha bhāsati;

     Enabled, he speaks confidently;

717. 717

     नच्छम्भतिnac·cham·bha·ti परिसगतोpa·ri·sa·ga·to नna वेधति,ve·dha·ti

     Nacchambhati parisagato na vedhati,

     Without fear, he doesn’t tremble in a gathering;

718. 718

     अत्थंat·thaṃ नna हापेतिhā·pe·ti अनुय्युतंa·nuy·yu·taṃ भणं।bha·ṇaṃ

     Atthaṁ na hāpeti anuyyutaṁ bhaṇaṁ.

     He doesn’t neglect the meaning and speaks naturally.

719. 719

     तथेवta·the·va पञ्हंpañ·haṃ परिसासुpa·ri·sā·su पुच्छितो,puc·chi·to

     Tatheva pañhaṁ parisāsu pucchito,

     If then asked a question in a gathering,

720. 720

     नna चेवce·va पज्झायतिpaj·jhā·ya·ti नna मङ्कुmaṅ·ku होति;ho·ti

     Na ceva pajjhāyati na maṅku hoti;

     He’s neither shy nor timid.

721. 721

     सोso कालागतंkā·lā·ga·taṃ ब्याकरणारहंbyā·ka·ra·ṇā·ra·haṃ वचो,va·co

     So kālāgataṁ byākaraṇārahaṁ vaco,

     His words are timely and pertinent;

722. 722

     रञ्जेतिrañ·je·ti विञ्ञूपरिसंviñ·ñū·pa·ri·saṃ विचक्खणो।vi·cak·kha·ṇo

     Rañjeti viññūparisaṁ vicakkhaṇo.

     He watchfully satisfies a discerning gathering.

723. 723

     सगारवोsa·gā·ra·vo वुड्ढतरेसुvuḍ·ḍha·ta·re·su भिक्खुसु,bhik·khu·su

     Sagāravo vuḍḍhataresu bhikkhusu,

     Respectful of more senior monks,

724. 724

     आचेरकम्हिā·ce·ra·kam·hi चca सकेsa·ke विसारदो;vi·sā·ra·do

     Ācerakamhi ca sake visārado;

     Having confidence in his teacher,

725. 725

     अलंa·laṃ पमेतुंpa·me·tuṃ पगुणोpa·gu·ṇo कथेतवे,ka·the·ta·ve

     Alaṁ pametuṁ paguṇo kathetave,

     Able to investigate, clever in discussion,

726. 726

     पच्चत्थिकानञ्चpac·cat·thi·kā·nañ·ca विरद्धिकोविदो।vi·rad·dhi·ko·vi·do

     Paccatthikānañca viraddhikovido.

     Skilled in defeating his opponents.

727. 727

     पच्चत्थिकाpac·cat·thi·kā येनye·na वजन्तिva·jan·ti निग्गहं,nig·ga·haṃ

     Paccatthikā yena vajanti niggahaṁ,

     Wherever his opponents turn, he refutes them,

728. 728

     महाजनोma·hā·ja·no सञ्ञपनञ्चsañ·ña·pa·nañ·ca गच्छति;gac·cha·ti

     Mahājano saññapanañca gacchati;

     And the crowd is convinced.

729. 729

     सकञ्चsa·kañ·ca आदायमयंā·dā·ya·ma·yaṃ नna रिञ्चति,riñ·ca·ti

     Sakañca ādāyamayaṁ na riñcati,

     He doesn’t abandon his position,

730. 730

     वियाकरंvi·yā·ka·raṃ पञ्हमनूपघातिकं।pañ·ha·ma·nū·pa·ghā·ti·kaṃ

     Viyākaraṁ pañhamanūpaghātikaṁ.

     Yet answers questions without hurting anyone.

731. 731

     दूतेय्यकम्मेसुdū·tey·ya·kam·me·su अलंa·laṃ समुग्गहो,sa·mug·ga·ho

     Dūteyyakammesu alaṁ samuggaho,

     He’s capable of acting as messenger,

732. 732

     सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa किच्चेसुkic·ce·su चca आहुā·hu नंnaṃ यथा;ya·thā

     Saṅghassa kiccesu ca āhu naṁ yathā;

     And about the business of the Sangha, <j>they speak to him.

733. 733

     करंka·raṃ वचोva·co भिक्खुगणेनbhik·khu·ga·ṇe·na पेसितो,pe·si·to

     Karaṁ vaco bhikkhugaṇena pesito,

     When speaking, <j>or sent out by the community of monks,

734. 734

     अहंa·haṃ करोमीतिka·ro·mī·ti नna तेनte·na मञ्ञति।mañ·ña·ti

     Ahaṁ karomīti na tena maññati.

     He doesn’t think, ‘I’m doing it.’

735. 735

     आपज्जतिā·paj·ja·ti यावतकेसुyā·va·ta·ke·su वत्थुसु,vat·thu·su

     Āpajjati yāvatakesu vatthusu,

     As far as the actions by which one commits offenses,

736. 736

     आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā होतिho·ti यथाya·thā चca वुट्ठिति;vuṭ·ṭhi·ti

     Āpattiyā hoti yathā ca vuṭṭhiti;

     And how they’re cleared,

737. 737

     एतेe·te विभङ्गाvi·bhaṅ·gā उभयस्सu·bha·yas·sa स्वागता,svā·ga·tā

     Ete vibhaṅgā ubhayassa svāgatā,

     Both these analyses he has learned well.

738. 738

     आपत्तिā·pat·ti वुट्ठानपदस्सvuṭ·ṭhā·na·pa·das·sa कोविदो।ko·vi·do

     Āpatti vuṭṭhānapadassa kovido.

     He’s skilled in the ways of clearing offenses.

739. 739

     निस्सारणंnis·sā·ra·ṇaṃ गच्छतिgac·cha·ti यानिyā·ni चाचरं,cā·ca·raṃ

     Nissāraṇaṁ gacchati yāni cācaraṁ,

     If one is sent away for one’s conduct,

740. 740

     निस्सारितोnis·sā·ri·to होतिho·ti यथाya·thā चca वत्तना;vat·ta·nā

     Nissārito hoti yathā ca vattanā;

     But once sent away one acts rightly,

741. 741

     ओसारणंo·sā·ra·ṇaṃ तंवुसितस्सtaṃ·vu·si·tas·sa जन्तुनो,jan·tu·no

     Osāraṇaṁ taṁvusitassa jantuno,

     There’s readmittance for one who lives thus.

742. 742

     एतम्पिe·tam·pi जानातिjā·nā·ti विभङ्गकोविदो।vi·bhaṅ·ga·ko·vi·do

     Etampi jānāti vibhaṅgakovido.

     This too he knows, the one skilled in analysis.

743. 743

     सगारवोsa·gā·ra·vo वुड्ढतरेसुvuḍ·ḍha·ta·re·su भिक्खुसु,bhik·khu·su

     Sagāravo vuḍḍhataresu bhikkhusu,

     Respectful of more senior monks,

744. 744

     नवेसुna·ve·su थेरेसुthe·re·su चca मज्झिमेसुmaj·jhi·me·su च;ca

     Navesu theresu ca majjhimesu ca;

     Yet whether junior, senior, or of middle standing,

745. 745

     महाजनस्सत्थचरोधma·hā·ja·nas·sat·tha·ca·ro·dha पण्डितो,paṇ·ḍi·to

     Mahājanassatthacarodha paṇḍito,

     The wise practice for the benefit of the many—

746. 746

     सोso तादिसोtā·di·so भिक्खुbhik·khu इधi·dha पग्गहारहो”ति।pag·ga·hā·ra·ho

     So tādiso bhikkhu idha paggahāraho”ti.

     Such a monk is fit to deal with these.”

747. 747

     कोसम्बकक्खन्धकोko·sam·ba·kak·khan·dha·ko दसमो।da·sa·mo

     Kosambakakkhandhako dasamo.

     The tenth chapter on division in the Sangha.

748. 748

     तस्सुद्दानंtas·sud·dā·naṃ

     Tassuddānaṁ

     This is the summary:

749. 749

     कोसम्बियंko·sam·bi·yaṃ जिनवरो,ji·na·va·ro

     Kosambiyaṁ jinavaro,

     “The splendid Victor was in Kosambī,

750. 750

     विवादापत्तिदस्सने;vi·vā·dā·pat·ti·das·sa·ne

     vivādāpattidassane;

     When disputing for not seeing an offense;

751. 751

     नुक्खिपेय्यnuk·khi·pey·ya यस्मिंyas·miṃ तस्मिं,tas·miṃ

     Nukkhipeyya yasmiṁ tasmiṁ,

     One should not eject for just any offense,

752. 752

     सद्धायापत्तिsad·dhā·yā·pat·ti देसये।de·sa·ye

     saddhāyāpatti desaye.

     One should confess an offense out of faith.

753. 753

     अन्तोसीमायंan·to·sī·mā·yaṃ तत्थेव,tat·the·va

     Antosīmāyaṁ tattheva,

     Just there inside the monastery zone,

754. 754

     बालकञ्चेवbā·la·kañ·ce·va वंसदा;vaṃ·sa·dā

     bālakañceva vaṁsadā;

     And just Bālaka, Bamboo Park;

755. 755

     पालिलेय्याpā·li·ley·yā चca सावत्थि,sā·vat·thi

     Pālileyyā ca sāvatthi,

     And Pālileyyā, Sāvatthī,

756. 756

     सारिपुत्तोsā·ri·put·to चca कोलितो।ko·li·to

     sāriputto ca kolito.

     And Sāriputta, Kolita.

757. 757

     महाकस्सपकच्चाना,ma·hā·kas·sa·pa·kac·cā·nā

     Mahākassapakaccānā,

     Mahākassapa, and Kaccāna,

758. 758

     कोट्ठिकोkoṭ·ṭhi·ko कप्पिनेनkap·pi·ne·na च;ca

     koṭṭhiko kappinena ca;

     Koṭṭhika, and with Kappina;

759. 759

     महाचुन्दोma·hā·cun·do अनुरुद्धो,a·nu·rud·dho

     Mahācundo anuruddho,

     Mahācunda, Anuruddha,

760. 760

     रेवतोre·va·to उपालिu·pā·li चुभो।cu·bho

     revato upāli cubho.

     And both Revata and Upāli.

761. 761

     आनन्दोā·nan·do राहुलोrā·hu·lo चेव,ce·va

     Ānando rāhulo ceva,

     Ānanda, and also Rāhula,

762. 762

     गोतमीनाथपिण्डिको;go·ta·mī·nā·tha·piṇ·ḍi·ko

     gotamīnāthapiṇḍiko;

     Gotamī, Anāthapiṇḍika;

763. 763

     सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ विवित्तञ्च,vi·vit·tañ·ca

     Senāsanaṁ vivittañca,

     And separate dwellings,

764. 764

     आमिसंā·mi·saṃ समकम्पिsa·ma·kam·pi च।ca

     āmisaṁ samakampi ca.

     And food and requisites equally.

765. 765

     नna केहिke·hi छन्दोchan·do दातब्बो,dā·tab·bo

     Na kehi chando dātabbo,

     No one is to give their consent,

766. 766

     उपालिपरिपुच्छितो;u·pā·li·pa·ri·puc·chi·to

     upāliparipucchito;

     Questioned by Upāli;

767. 767

     अनानुवज्जोa·nā·nu·vaj·jo सीलेन,sī·le·na

     Anānuvajjo sīlena,

     Blameless in morality,

768. 768

     सामग्गीsā·mag·gī जिनसासनेति।ji·na·sā·sa·ne·ti

     sāmaggī jinasāsaneti.

     Harmonious in the Teaching of the Victor.”

769. 769

     कोसम्बकक्खन्धकोko·sam·ba·kak·khan·dha·ko निट्ठितो।niṭ·ṭhi·to

     Kosambakakkhandhako niṭṭhito.

     The chapter on division in the Sangha is finished.

770. 770

     महावग्गोma·hā·vag·go निट्ठितो।niṭ·ṭhi·to

     Mahāvaggo niṭṭhito.

     The Great Division is finished.

771. 771

     महावग्गपाळिma·hā·vag·ga·pā·ḷi निट्ठिता।niṭ·ṭhi·tā

     Mahāvaggapāḷi niṭṭhitā.

     The canonical text of the Great Division is finished.

Sources. Sanskrit: Satyavedaḥ, the New Testament in Sanskrit (Calcutta Baptist Missionaries, 1851; J. Wenger’s revision of W. Carey’s version). Digital text © 2018 SanskritBible.in, via eBible.org, licensed CC BY-SA 4.0; changed here: arranged by verse and every word linked to the dictionary (links made automatically). Old Testament Sanskrit: the Old Testament in Sanskrit, Calcutta Baptist Mission Press, 1848–1852 (public domain), read by OCR from the Internet Archive scans of the Boston University School of Theology copy; unproofread, with machine clean-up only. Pāli Canon: Mahāsaṅgīti Tipiṭaka Buddhavasse 2500 (based on the Vipassana Research Institute’s Chaṭṭha Saṅgāyana edition), from SuttaCentral bilara-data, CC0; Devanagari and pronunciation made automatically from the Roman text. Pāli English: Bhikkhu Sujato (suttas) and Bhikkhu Brahmali (Vinaya), SuttaCentral, CC0. Pāli word meanings: the Pali Text Society’s Pali-English Dictionary (Rhys Davids & Stede), corrected reprint © The Pali Text Society, CC BY-NC 3.0, digital text from BuddhaDust; word matching automatic. English: King James Version (1769), public domain; words the translators added are in italics. Word meanings and pronunciations: Monier-Williams, Sanskrit–English Dictionary (1872), via this site’s Sanskrit dictionary (CC BY-SA 4.0); English↔Sanskrit word matches made automatically and may need checking.